]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispref/display.texi
Merge from origin/emacs-25
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispref / display.texi
1 @c -*- mode: texinfo; coding: utf-8 -*-
2 @c This is part of the GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual.
3 @c Copyright (C) 1990-1995, 1998-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @c See the file elisp.texi for copying conditions.
5 @node Display
6 @chapter Emacs Display
7
8 This chapter describes a number of features related to the display
9 that Emacs presents to the user.
10
11 @menu
12 * Refresh Screen:: Clearing the screen and redrawing everything on it.
13 * Forcing Redisplay:: Forcing redisplay.
14 * Truncation:: Folding or wrapping long text lines.
15 * The Echo Area:: Displaying messages at the bottom of the screen.
16 * Warnings:: Displaying warning messages for the user.
17 * Invisible Text:: Hiding part of the buffer text.
18 * Selective Display:: Hiding part of the buffer text (the old way).
19 * Temporary Displays:: Displays that go away automatically.
20 * Overlays:: Use overlays to highlight parts of the buffer.
21 * Size of Displayed Text:: How large displayed text is.
22 * Line Height:: Controlling the height of lines.
23 * Faces:: A face defines a graphics style for text characters:
24 font, colors, etc.
25 * Fringes:: Controlling window fringes.
26 * Scroll Bars:: Controlling scroll bars.
27 * Window Dividers:: Separating windows visually.
28 * Display Property:: Enabling special display features.
29 * Images:: Displaying images in Emacs buffers.
30 * Xwidgets:: Displaying native widgets in Emacs buffers.
31 * Buttons:: Adding clickable buttons to Emacs buffers.
32 * Abstract Display:: Emacs's Widget for Object Collections.
33 * Blinking:: How Emacs shows the matching open parenthesis.
34 * Character Display:: How Emacs displays individual characters.
35 * Beeping:: Audible signal to the user.
36 * Window Systems:: Which window system is being used.
37 * Tooltips:: Tooltip display in Emacs.
38 * Bidirectional Display:: Display of bidirectional scripts, such as
39 Arabic and Farsi.
40 @end menu
41
42 @node Refresh Screen
43 @section Refreshing the Screen
44 @cindex refresh the screen
45 @cindex screen refresh
46
47 The function @code{redraw-frame} clears and redisplays the entire
48 contents of a given frame (@pxref{Frames}). This is useful if the
49 screen is corrupted.
50
51 @defun redraw-frame &optional frame
52 This function clears and redisplays frame @var{frame}. If @var{frame}
53 is omitted or nil, it redraws the selected frame.
54 @end defun
55
56 Even more powerful is @code{redraw-display}:
57
58 @deffn Command redraw-display
59 This function clears and redisplays all visible frames.
60 @end deffn
61
62 In Emacs, processing user input takes priority over redisplay. If
63 you call these functions when input is available, they don't redisplay
64 immediately, but the requested redisplay does happen
65 eventually---after all the input has been processed.
66
67 On text terminals, suspending and resuming Emacs normally also
68 refreshes the screen. Some terminal emulators record separate
69 contents for display-oriented programs such as Emacs and for ordinary
70 sequential display. If you are using such a terminal, you might want
71 to inhibit the redisplay on resumption.
72
73 @defopt no-redraw-on-reenter
74 @cindex suspend (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
75 @cindex resume (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
76 This variable controls whether Emacs redraws the entire screen after it
77 has been suspended and resumed. Non-@code{nil} means there is no need
78 to redraw, @code{nil} means redrawing is needed. The default is @code{nil}.
79 @end defopt
80
81 @node Forcing Redisplay
82 @section Forcing Redisplay
83 @cindex forcing redisplay
84
85 Emacs normally tries to redisplay the screen whenever it waits for
86 input. With the following function, you can request an immediate
87 attempt to redisplay, in the middle of Lisp code, without actually
88 waiting for input.
89
90 @defun redisplay &optional force
91 This function tries immediately to redisplay. The optional argument
92 @var{force}, if non-@code{nil}, forces the redisplay to be performed,
93 instead of being preempted if input is pending.
94
95 The function returns @code{t} if it actually tried to redisplay, and
96 @code{nil} otherwise. A value of @code{t} does not mean that
97 redisplay proceeded to completion; it could have been preempted by
98 newly arriving input.
99 @end defun
100
101 Although @code{redisplay} tries immediately to redisplay, it does
102 not change how Emacs decides which parts of its frame(s) to redisplay.
103 By contrast, the following function adds certain windows to the
104 pending redisplay work (as if their contents had completely changed),
105 but does not immediately try to perform redisplay.
106
107 @defun force-window-update &optional object
108 This function forces some or all windows to be updated the next time
109 Emacs does a redisplay. If @var{object} is a window, that window is
110 to be updated. If @var{object} is a buffer or buffer name, all
111 windows displaying that buffer are to be updated. If @var{object} is
112 @code{nil} (or omitted), all windows are to be updated.
113
114 This function does not do a redisplay immediately; Emacs does that as
115 it waits for input, or when the function @code{redisplay} is called.
116 @end defun
117
118 @defvar pre-redisplay-function
119 A function run just before redisplay. It is called with one argument,
120 the set of windows to be redisplayed. The set can be @code{nil},
121 meaning only the selected window, or @code{t}, meaning all the
122 windows.
123 @end defvar
124
125 @defvar pre-redisplay-functions
126 This hook is run just before redisplay. It is called once in each
127 window that is about to be redisplayed, with @code{current-buffer} set
128 to the buffer displayed in that window.
129 @end defvar
130
131 @node Truncation
132 @section Truncation
133 @cindex line wrapping
134 @cindex line truncation
135 @cindex continuation lines
136 @cindex @samp{$} in display
137 @cindex @samp{\} in display
138
139 When a line of text extends beyond the right edge of a window, Emacs
140 can @dfn{continue} the line (make it wrap to the next screen
141 line), or @dfn{truncate} the line (limit it to one screen line). The
142 additional screen lines used to display a long text line are called
143 @dfn{continuation} lines. Continuation is not the same as filling;
144 continuation happens on the screen only, not in the buffer contents,
145 and it breaks a line precisely at the right margin, not at a word
146 boundary. @xref{Filling}.
147
148 On a graphical display, tiny arrow images in the window fringes
149 indicate truncated and continued lines (@pxref{Fringes}). On a text
150 terminal, a @samp{$} in the rightmost column of the window indicates
151 truncation; a @samp{\} on the rightmost column indicates a line that
152 wraps. (The display table can specify alternate characters to use
153 for this; @pxref{Display Tables}).
154
155 @defopt truncate-lines
156 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, lines that extend
157 beyond the right edge of the window are truncated; otherwise, they are
158 continued. As a special exception, the variable
159 @code{truncate-partial-width-windows} takes precedence in
160 @dfn{partial-width} windows (i.e., windows that do not occupy the
161 entire frame width).
162 @end defopt
163
164 @defopt truncate-partial-width-windows
165 @cindex partial-width windows
166 This variable controls line truncation in @dfn{partial-width} windows.
167 A partial-width window is one that does not occupy the entire frame
168 width (@pxref{Splitting Windows}). If the value is @code{nil}, line
169 truncation is determined by the variable @code{truncate-lines} (see
170 above). If the value is an integer @var{n}, lines are truncated if
171 the partial-width window has fewer than @var{n} columns, regardless of
172 the value of @code{truncate-lines}; if the partial-width window has
173 @var{n} or more columns, line truncation is determined by
174 @code{truncate-lines}. For any other non-@code{nil} value, lines are
175 truncated in every partial-width window, regardless of the value of
176 @code{truncate-lines}.
177 @end defopt
178
179 When horizontal scrolling (@pxref{Horizontal Scrolling}) is in use in
180 a window, that forces truncation.
181
182 @defvar wrap-prefix
183 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
184 @dfn{wrap prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
185 continuation line. (If lines are truncated, @code{wrap-prefix} is
186 never used.) Its value may be a string or an image (@pxref{Other
187 Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as specified by the
188 @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties (@pxref{Specified
189 Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way as a @code{display}
190 text property. @xref{Display Property}.
191
192 A wrap prefix may also be specified for regions of text, using the
193 @code{wrap-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
194 over the @code{wrap-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
195 @end defvar
196
197 @defvar line-prefix
198 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
199 @dfn{line prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
200 non-continuation line. Its value may be a string or an image
201 (@pxref{Other Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as
202 specified by the @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties
203 (@pxref{Specified Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way
204 as a @code{display} text property. @xref{Display Property}.
205
206 A line prefix may also be specified for regions of text using the
207 @code{line-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
208 over the @code{line-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
209 @end defvar
210
211 @ignore
212 If your buffer contains only very short lines, you might find it
213 advisable to set @code{cache-long-scans} to @code{nil}.
214
215 @defvar cache-long-scans
216 If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default), various indentation
217 and motion functions, and Emacs redisplay, cache the results of
218 scanning the buffer, and consult the cache to avoid rescanning regions
219 of the buffer unless they are modified.
220
221 Turning off the cache speeds up processing of short lines somewhat.
222
223 This variable is automatically buffer-local in every buffer.
224 @end defvar
225 @end ignore
226
227 @node The Echo Area
228 @section The Echo Area
229 @cindex error display
230 @cindex echo area
231
232 @c FIXME: Why not use @xref{Minibuffers} directly? --xfq
233 The @dfn{echo area} is used for displaying error messages
234 (@pxref{Errors}), for messages made with the @code{message} primitive,
235 and for echoing keystrokes. It is not the same as the minibuffer,
236 despite the fact that the minibuffer appears (when active) in the same
237 place on the screen as the echo area. @xref{Minibuffer,, The
238 Minibuffer, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
239
240 Apart from the functions documented in this section, you can print
241 Lisp objects to the echo area by specifying @code{t} as the output
242 stream. @xref{Output Streams}.
243
244 @menu
245 * Displaying Messages:: Explicitly displaying text in the echo area.
246 * Progress:: Informing user about progress of a long operation.
247 * Logging Messages:: Echo area messages are logged for the user.
248 * Echo Area Customization:: Controlling the echo area.
249 @end menu
250
251 @node Displaying Messages
252 @subsection Displaying Messages in the Echo Area
253 @cindex display message in echo area
254
255 This section describes the standard functions for displaying
256 messages in the echo area.
257
258 @defun message format-string &rest arguments
259 This function displays a message in the echo area.
260 @var{format-string} is a format string, and @var{arguments} are the
261 objects for its format specifications, like in the @code{format-message}
262 function (@pxref{Formatting Strings}). The resulting formatted string
263 is displayed in the echo area; if it contains @code{face} text
264 properties, it is displayed with the specified faces (@pxref{Faces}).
265 The string is also added to the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but without
266 text properties (@pxref{Logging Messages}).
267
268 The @code{text-quoting-style} variable controls what quotes are
269 generated; @xref{Keys in Documentation}. A call using a format like
270 @t{"Missing `%s'"} with grave accents and apostrophes typically
271 generates a message like @t{"Missing ‘foo’"} with matching curved
272 quotes. In contrast, a call using a format like @t{"Missing '%s'"}
273 with only apostrophes typically generates a message like @t{"Missing
274 ’foo’"} with only closing curved quotes, an unusual style in English.
275
276 In batch mode, the message is printed to the standard error stream,
277 followed by a newline.
278
279 When @code{inhibit-message} is non-@code{nil}, no message will be displayed
280 in the echo area, it will only be logged to @samp{*Messages*}.
281
282 If @var{format-string} is @code{nil} or the empty string,
283 @code{message} clears the echo area; if the echo area has been
284 expanded automatically, this brings it back to its normal size. If
285 the minibuffer is active, this brings the minibuffer contents back
286 onto the screen immediately.
287
288 @example
289 @group
290 (message "Reverting `%s'..." (buffer-name))
291 @print{} Reverting ‘subr.el’...
292 @result{} "Reverting ‘subr.el’..."
293 @end group
294
295 @group
296 ---------- Echo Area ----------
297 Reverting ‘subr.el’...
298 ---------- Echo Area ----------
299 @end group
300 @end example
301
302 To automatically display a message in the echo area or in a pop-buffer,
303 depending on its size, use @code{display-message-or-buffer} (see below).
304
305 @strong{Warning:} If you want to use your own string as a message
306 verbatim, don't just write @code{(message @var{string})}. If
307 @var{string} contains @samp{%}, @samp{`}, or @samp{'} it may be
308 reformatted, with undesirable results. Instead, use @code{(message
309 "%s" @var{string})}.
310 @end defun
311
312 @defvar inhibit-message
313 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{message} and related functions
314 will not use the Echo Area to display messages.
315 @end defvar
316
317 @defmac with-temp-message message &rest body
318 This construct displays a message in the echo area temporarily, during
319 the execution of @var{body}. It displays @var{message}, executes
320 @var{body}, then returns the value of the last body form while restoring
321 the previous echo area contents.
322 @end defmac
323
324 @defun message-or-box format-string &rest arguments
325 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but may display it
326 in a dialog box instead of the echo area. If this function is called in
327 a command that was invoked using the mouse---more precisely, if
328 @code{last-nonmenu-event} (@pxref{Command Loop Info}) is either
329 @code{nil} or a list---then it uses a dialog box or pop-up menu to
330 display the message. Otherwise, it uses the echo area. (This is the
331 same criterion that @code{y-or-n-p} uses to make a similar decision; see
332 @ref{Yes-or-No Queries}.)
333
334 You can force use of the mouse or of the echo area by binding
335 @code{last-nonmenu-event} to a suitable value around the call.
336 @end defun
337
338 @defun message-box format-string &rest arguments
339 @anchor{message-box}
340 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but uses a dialog
341 box (or a pop-up menu) whenever that is possible. If it is impossible
342 to use a dialog box or pop-up menu, because the terminal does not
343 support them, then @code{message-box} uses the echo area, like
344 @code{message}.
345 @end defun
346
347 @defun display-message-or-buffer message &optional buffer-name action frame
348 This function displays the message @var{message}, which may be either a
349 string or a buffer. If it is shorter than the maximum height of the
350 echo area, as defined by @code{max-mini-window-height}, it is displayed
351 in the echo area, using @code{message}. Otherwise,
352 @code{display-buffer} is used to show it in a pop-up buffer.
353
354 Returns either the string shown in the echo area, or when a pop-up
355 buffer is used, the window used to display it.
356
357 If @var{message} is a string, then the optional argument
358 @var{buffer-name} is the name of the buffer used to display it when a
359 pop-up buffer is used, defaulting to @file{*Message*}. In the case
360 where @var{message} is a string and displayed in the echo area, it is
361 not specified whether the contents are inserted into the buffer anyway.
362
363 The optional arguments @var{action} and @var{frame} are as for
364 @code{display-buffer}, and only used if a buffer is displayed.
365 @end defun
366
367 @defun current-message
368 This function returns the message currently being displayed in the
369 echo area, or @code{nil} if there is none.
370 @end defun
371
372 @node Progress
373 @subsection Reporting Operation Progress
374 @cindex progress reporting
375
376 When an operation can take a while to finish, you should inform the
377 user about the progress it makes. This way the user can estimate
378 remaining time and clearly see that Emacs is busy working, not hung.
379 A convenient way to do this is to use a @dfn{progress reporter}.
380
381 Here is a working example that does nothing useful:
382
383 @smallexample
384 (let ((progress-reporter
385 (make-progress-reporter "Collecting mana for Emacs..."
386 0 500)))
387 (dotimes (k 500)
388 (sit-for 0.01)
389 (progress-reporter-update progress-reporter k))
390 (progress-reporter-done progress-reporter))
391 @end smallexample
392
393 @defun make-progress-reporter message &optional min-value max-value current-value min-change min-time
394 This function creates and returns a progress reporter object, which
395 you will use as an argument for the other functions listed below. The
396 idea is to precompute as much data as possible to make progress
397 reporting very fast.
398
399 When this progress reporter is subsequently used, it will display
400 @var{message} in the echo area, followed by progress percentage.
401 @var{message} is treated as a simple string. If you need it to depend
402 on a filename, for instance, use @code{format-message} before calling this
403 function.
404
405 The arguments @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} should be numbers
406 standing for the starting and final states of the operation. For
407 instance, an operation that scans a buffer should set these to the
408 results of @code{point-min} and @code{point-max} correspondingly.
409 @var{max-value} should be greater than @var{min-value}.
410
411 Alternatively, you can set @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} to
412 @code{nil}. In that case, the progress reporter does not report
413 process percentages; it instead displays a ``spinner'' that rotates a
414 notch each time you update the progress reporter.
415
416 If @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} are numbers, you can give the
417 argument @var{current-value} a numerical value specifying the initial
418 progress; if omitted, this defaults to @var{min-value}.
419
420 The remaining arguments control the rate of echo area updates. The
421 progress reporter will wait for at least @var{min-change} more
422 percents of the operation to be completed before printing next
423 message; the default is one percent. @var{min-time} specifies the
424 minimum time in seconds to pass between successive prints; the default
425 is 0.2 seconds. (On some operating systems, the progress reporter may
426 handle fractions of seconds with varying precision).
427
428 This function calls @code{progress-reporter-update}, so the first
429 message is printed immediately.
430 @end defun
431
432 @defun progress-reporter-update reporter &optional value
433 This function does the main work of reporting progress of your
434 operation. It displays the message of @var{reporter}, followed by
435 progress percentage determined by @var{value}. If percentage is zero,
436 or close enough according to the @var{min-change} and @var{min-time}
437 arguments, then it is omitted from the output.
438
439 @var{reporter} must be the result of a call to
440 @code{make-progress-reporter}. @var{value} specifies the current
441 state of your operation and must be between @var{min-value} and
442 @var{max-value} (inclusive) as passed to
443 @code{make-progress-reporter}. For instance, if you scan a buffer,
444 then @var{value} should be the result of a call to @code{point}.
445
446 This function respects @var{min-change} and @var{min-time} as passed
447 to @code{make-progress-reporter} and so does not output new messages
448 on every invocation. It is thus very fast and normally you should not
449 try to reduce the number of calls to it: resulting overhead will most
450 likely negate your effort.
451 @end defun
452
453 @defun progress-reporter-force-update reporter &optional value new-message
454 This function is similar to @code{progress-reporter-update} except
455 that it prints a message in the echo area unconditionally.
456
457 The first two arguments have the same meaning as for
458 @code{progress-reporter-update}. Optional @var{new-message} allows
459 you to change the message of the @var{reporter}. Since this function
460 always updates the echo area, such a change will be immediately
461 presented to the user.
462 @end defun
463
464 @defun progress-reporter-done reporter
465 This function should be called when the operation is finished. It
466 prints the message of @var{reporter} followed by word @samp{done} in the
467 echo area.
468
469 You should always call this function and not hope for
470 @code{progress-reporter-update} to print @samp{100%}. Firstly, it may
471 never print it, there are many good reasons for this not to happen.
472 Secondly, @samp{done} is more explicit.
473 @end defun
474
475 @defmac dotimes-with-progress-reporter (var count [result]) message body@dots{}
476 This is a convenience macro that works the same way as @code{dotimes}
477 does, but also reports loop progress using the functions described
478 above. It allows you to save some typing.
479
480 You can rewrite the example in the beginning of this node using
481 this macro this way:
482
483 @example
484 (dotimes-with-progress-reporter
485 (k 500)
486 "Collecting some mana for Emacs..."
487 (sit-for 0.01))
488 @end example
489 @end defmac
490
491 @node Logging Messages
492 @subsection Logging Messages in @file{*Messages*}
493 @cindex logging echo-area messages
494
495 Almost all the messages displayed in the echo area are also recorded
496 in the @file{*Messages*} buffer so that the user can refer back to
497 them. This includes all the messages that are output with
498 @code{message}. By default, this buffer is read-only and uses the major
499 mode @code{messages-buffer-mode}. Nothing prevents the user from
500 killing the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but the next display of a message
501 recreates it. Any Lisp code that needs to access the
502 @file{*Messages*} buffer directly and wants to ensure that it exists
503 should use the function @code{messages-buffer}.
504
505 @defun messages-buffer
506 This function returns the @file{*Messages*} buffer. If it does not
507 exist, it creates it, and switches it to @code{messages-buffer-mode}.
508 @end defun
509
510 @defopt message-log-max
511 This variable specifies how many lines to keep in the @file{*Messages*}
512 buffer. The value @code{t} means there is no limit on how many lines to
513 keep. The value @code{nil} disables message logging entirely. Here's
514 how to display a message and prevent it from being logged:
515
516 @example
517 (let (message-log-max)
518 (message @dots{}))
519 @end example
520 @end defopt
521
522 To make @file{*Messages*} more convenient for the user, the logging
523 facility combines successive identical messages. It also combines
524 successive related messages for the sake of two cases: question
525 followed by answer, and a series of progress messages.
526
527 A question followed by an answer has two messages like the
528 ones produced by @code{y-or-n-p}: the first is @samp{@var{question}},
529 and the second is @samp{@var{question}...@var{answer}}. The first
530 message conveys no additional information beyond what's in the second,
531 so logging the second message discards the first from the log.
532
533 A series of progress messages has successive messages like
534 those produced by @code{make-progress-reporter}. They have the form
535 @samp{@var{base}...@var{how-far}}, where @var{base} is the same each
536 time, while @var{how-far} varies. Logging each message in the series
537 discards the previous one, provided they are consecutive.
538
539 The functions @code{make-progress-reporter} and @code{y-or-n-p}
540 don't have to do anything special to activate the message log
541 combination feature. It operates whenever two consecutive messages
542 are logged that share a common prefix ending in @samp{...}.
543
544 @node Echo Area Customization
545 @subsection Echo Area Customization
546 @cindex echo area customization
547
548 These variables control details of how the echo area works.
549
550 @defvar cursor-in-echo-area
551 This variable controls where the cursor appears when a message is
552 displayed in the echo area. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the cursor
553 appears at the end of the message. Otherwise, the cursor appears at
554 point---not in the echo area at all.
555
556 The value is normally @code{nil}; Lisp programs bind it to @code{t}
557 for brief periods of time.
558 @end defvar
559
560 @defvar echo-area-clear-hook
561 This normal hook is run whenever the echo area is cleared---either by
562 @code{(message nil)} or for any other reason.
563 @end defvar
564
565 @defopt echo-keystrokes
566 This variable determines how much time should elapse before command
567 characters echo. Its value must be a number, and specifies the
568 number of seconds to wait before echoing. If the user types a prefix
569 key (such as @kbd{C-x}) and then delays this many seconds before
570 continuing, the prefix key is echoed in the echo area. (Once echoing
571 begins in a key sequence, all subsequent characters in the same key
572 sequence are echoed immediately.)
573
574 If the value is zero, then command input is not echoed.
575 @end defopt
576
577 @defvar message-truncate-lines
578 Normally, displaying a long message resizes the echo area to display
579 the entire message. But if the variable @code{message-truncate-lines}
580 is non-@code{nil}, the echo area does not resize, and the message is
581 truncated to fit it.
582 @end defvar
583
584 The variable @code{max-mini-window-height}, which specifies the
585 maximum height for resizing minibuffer windows, also applies to the
586 echo area (which is really a special use of the minibuffer window;
587 @pxref{Minibuffer Misc}).
588
589 @node Warnings
590 @section Reporting Warnings
591 @cindex warnings
592
593 @dfn{Warnings} are a facility for a program to inform the user of a
594 possible problem, but continue running.
595
596 @menu
597 * Warning Basics:: Warnings concepts and functions to report them.
598 * Warning Variables:: Variables programs bind to customize their warnings.
599 * Warning Options:: Variables users set to control display of warnings.
600 * Delayed Warnings:: Deferring a warning until the end of a command.
601 @end menu
602
603 @node Warning Basics
604 @subsection Warning Basics
605 @cindex severity level
606
607 Every warning has a textual message, which explains the problem for
608 the user, and a @dfn{severity level} which is a symbol. Here are the
609 possible severity levels, in order of decreasing severity, and their
610 meanings:
611
612 @table @code
613 @item :emergency
614 A problem that will seriously impair Emacs operation soon
615 if you do not attend to it promptly.
616 @item :error
617 A report of data or circumstances that are inherently wrong.
618 @item :warning
619 A report of data or circumstances that are not inherently wrong, but
620 raise suspicion of a possible problem.
621 @item :debug
622 A report of information that may be useful if you are debugging.
623 @end table
624
625 When your program encounters invalid input data, it can either
626 signal a Lisp error by calling @code{error} or @code{signal} or report
627 a warning with severity @code{:error}. Signaling a Lisp error is the
628 easiest thing to do, but it means the program cannot continue
629 processing. If you want to take the trouble to implement a way to
630 continue processing despite the bad data, then reporting a warning of
631 severity @code{:error} is the right way to inform the user of the
632 problem. For instance, the Emacs Lisp byte compiler can report an
633 error that way and continue compiling other functions. (If the
634 program signals a Lisp error and then handles it with
635 @code{condition-case}, the user won't see the error message; it could
636 show the message to the user by reporting it as a warning.)
637
638 @c FIXME: Why use "(bytecomp)" instead of "'bytecomp" or simply
639 @c "bytecomp" here? The parens are part of warning-type-format but
640 @c not part of the warning type. --xfq
641 @cindex warning type
642 Each warning has a @dfn{warning type} to classify it. The type is a
643 list of symbols. The first symbol should be the custom group that you
644 use for the program's user options. For example, byte compiler
645 warnings use the warning type @code{(bytecomp)}. You can also
646 subcategorize the warnings, if you wish, by using more symbols in the
647 list.
648
649 @defun display-warning type message &optional level buffer-name
650 This function reports a warning, using @var{message} as the message
651 and @var{type} as the warning type. @var{level} should be the
652 severity level, with @code{:warning} being the default.
653
654 @var{buffer-name}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the name of the buffer
655 for logging the warning. By default, it is @file{*Warnings*}.
656 @end defun
657
658 @defun lwarn type level message &rest args
659 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
660 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message in the @file{*Warnings*}
661 buffer. In other respects it is equivalent to @code{display-warning}.
662 @end defun
663
664 @defun warn message &rest args
665 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
666 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message, @code{(emacs)} as the
667 type, and @code{:warning} as the severity level. It exists for
668 compatibility only; we recommend not using it, because you should
669 specify a specific warning type.
670 @end defun
671
672 @node Warning Variables
673 @subsection Warning Variables
674 @cindex warning variables
675
676 Programs can customize how their warnings appear by binding
677 the variables described in this section.
678
679 @defvar warning-levels
680 This list defines the meaning and severity order of the warning
681 severity levels. Each element defines one severity level,
682 and they are arranged in order of decreasing severity.
683
684 Each element has the form @code{(@var{level} @var{string}
685 @var{function})}, where @var{level} is the severity level it defines.
686 @var{string} specifies the textual description of this level.
687 @var{string} should use @samp{%s} to specify where to put the warning
688 type information, or it can omit the @samp{%s} so as not to include
689 that information.
690
691 The optional @var{function}, if non-@code{nil}, is a function to call
692 with no arguments, to get the user's attention.
693
694 Normally you should not change the value of this variable.
695 @end defvar
696
697 @defvar warning-prefix-function
698 If non-@code{nil}, the value is a function to generate prefix text for
699 warnings. Programs can bind the variable to a suitable function.
700 @code{display-warning} calls this function with the warnings buffer
701 current, and the function can insert text in it. That text becomes
702 the beginning of the warning message.
703
704 The function is called with two arguments, the severity level and its
705 entry in @code{warning-levels}. It should return a list to use as the
706 entry (this value need not be an actual member of
707 @code{warning-levels}). By constructing this value, the function can
708 change the severity of the warning, or specify different handling for
709 a given severity level.
710
711 If the variable's value is @code{nil} then there is no function
712 to call.
713 @end defvar
714
715 @defvar warning-series
716 Programs can bind this variable to @code{t} to say that the next
717 warning should begin a series. When several warnings form a series,
718 that means to leave point on the first warning of the series, rather
719 than keep moving it for each warning so that it appears on the last one.
720 The series ends when the local binding is unbound and
721 @code{warning-series} becomes @code{nil} again.
722
723 The value can also be a symbol with a function definition. That is
724 equivalent to @code{t}, except that the next warning will also call
725 the function with no arguments with the warnings buffer current. The
726 function can insert text which will serve as a header for the series
727 of warnings.
728
729 Once a series has begun, the value is a marker which points to the
730 buffer position in the warnings buffer of the start of the series.
731
732 The variable's normal value is @code{nil}, which means to handle
733 each warning separately.
734 @end defvar
735
736 @defvar warning-fill-prefix
737 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a fill prefix to
738 use for filling each warning's text.
739 @end defvar
740
741 @defvar warning-type-format
742 This variable specifies the format for displaying the warning type
743 in the warning message. The result of formatting the type this way
744 gets included in the message under the control of the string in the
745 entry in @code{warning-levels}. The default value is @code{" (%s)"}.
746 If you bind it to @code{""} then the warning type won't appear at
747 all.
748 @end defvar
749
750 @node Warning Options
751 @subsection Warning Options
752 @cindex warning options
753
754 These variables are used by users to control what happens
755 when a Lisp program reports a warning.
756
757 @defopt warning-minimum-level
758 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
759 shown immediately to the user. The default is @code{:warning}, which
760 means to immediately display all warnings except @code{:debug}
761 warnings.
762 @end defopt
763
764 @defopt warning-minimum-log-level
765 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
766 logged in the warnings buffer. The default is @code{:warning}, which
767 means to log all warnings except @code{:debug} warnings.
768 @end defopt
769
770 @defopt warning-suppress-types
771 This list specifies which warning types should not be displayed
772 immediately for the user. Each element of the list should be a list
773 of symbols. If its elements match the first elements in a warning
774 type, then that warning is not displayed immediately.
775 @end defopt
776
777 @defopt warning-suppress-log-types
778 This list specifies which warning types should not be logged in the
779 warnings buffer. Each element of the list should be a list of
780 symbols. If it matches the first few elements in a warning type, then
781 that warning is not logged.
782 @end defopt
783
784 @node Delayed Warnings
785 @subsection Delayed Warnings
786 @cindex delayed warnings
787
788 Sometimes, you may wish to avoid showing a warning while a command is
789 running, and only show it only after the end of the command. You can
790 use the variable @code{delayed-warnings-list} for this.
791
792 @defvar delayed-warnings-list
793 The value of this variable is a list of warnings to be displayed after
794 the current command has finished. Each element must be a list
795
796 @smallexample
797 (@var{type} @var{message} [@var{level} [@var{buffer-name}]])
798 @end smallexample
799
800 @noindent
801 with the same form, and the same meanings, as the argument list of
802 @code{display-warning} (@pxref{Warning Basics}). Immediately after
803 running @code{post-command-hook} (@pxref{Command Overview}), the Emacs
804 command loop displays all the warnings specified by this variable,
805 then resets it to @code{nil}.
806 @end defvar
807
808 Programs which need to further customize the delayed warnings
809 mechanism can change the variable @code{delayed-warnings-hook}:
810
811 @defvar delayed-warnings-hook
812 This is a normal hook which is run by the Emacs command loop, after
813 @code{post-command-hook}, in order to to process and display delayed
814 warnings.
815
816 Its default value is a list of two functions:
817
818 @smallexample
819 (collapse-delayed-warnings display-delayed-warnings)
820 @end smallexample
821
822 @findex collapse-delayed-warnings
823 @findex display-delayed-warnings
824 @noindent
825 The function @code{collapse-delayed-warnings} removes repeated entries
826 from @code{delayed-warnings-list}. The function
827 @code{display-delayed-warnings} calls @code{display-warning} on each
828 of the entries in @code{delayed-warnings-list}, in turn, and then sets
829 @code{delayed-warnings-list} to @code{nil}.
830 @end defvar
831
832 @node Invisible Text
833 @section Invisible Text
834
835 @cindex invisible text
836 You can make characters @dfn{invisible}, so that they do not appear on
837 the screen, with the @code{invisible} property. This can be either a
838 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}) or an overlay property
839 (@pxref{Overlays}). Cursor motion also partly ignores these
840 characters; if the command loop finds that point is inside a range of
841 invisible text after a command, it relocates point to the other side
842 of the text.
843
844 In the simplest case, any non-@code{nil} @code{invisible} property makes
845 a character invisible. This is the default case---if you don't alter
846 the default value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}, this is how the
847 @code{invisible} property works. You should normally use @code{t}
848 as the value of the @code{invisible} property if you don't plan
849 to set @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} yourself.
850
851 More generally, you can use the variable @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
852 to control which values of the @code{invisible} property make text
853 invisible. This permits you to classify the text into different subsets
854 in advance, by giving them different @code{invisible} values, and
855 subsequently make various subsets visible or invisible by changing the
856 value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
857
858 Controlling visibility with @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is
859 especially useful in a program to display the list of entries in a
860 database. It permits the implementation of convenient filtering
861 commands to view just a part of the entries in the database. Setting
862 this variable is very fast, much faster than scanning all the text in
863 the buffer looking for properties to change.
864
865 @defvar buffer-invisibility-spec
866 This variable specifies which kinds of @code{invisible} properties
867 actually make a character invisible. Setting this variable makes it
868 buffer-local.
869
870 @table @asis
871 @item @code{t}
872 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property is
873 non-@code{nil}. This is the default.
874
875 @item a list
876 Each element of the list specifies a criterion for invisibility; if a
877 character's @code{invisible} property fits any one of these criteria,
878 the character is invisible. The list can have two kinds of elements:
879
880 @table @code
881 @item @var{atom}
882 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
883 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
884 is done with @code{eq}.
885
886 @item (@var{atom} . t)
887 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
888 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
889 is done with @code{eq}. Moreover, a sequence of such characters
890 displays as an ellipsis.
891 @end table
892 @end table
893 @end defvar
894
895 Two functions are specifically provided for adding elements to
896 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and removing elements from it.
897
898 @defun add-to-invisibility-spec element
899 This function adds the element @var{element} to
900 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. If @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
901 was @code{t}, it changes to a list, @code{(t)}, so that text whose
902 @code{invisible} property is @code{t} remains invisible.
903 @end defun
904
905 @defun remove-from-invisibility-spec element
906 This removes the element @var{element} from
907 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. This does nothing if @var{element}
908 is not in the list.
909 @end defun
910
911 A convention for use of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is that a
912 major mode should use the mode's own name as an element of
913 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and as the value of the
914 @code{invisible} property:
915
916 @example
917 ;; @r{If you want to display an ellipsis:}
918 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
919 ;; @r{If you don't want ellipsis:}
920 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
921
922 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end)
923 'invisible 'my-symbol)
924
925 ;; @r{When done with the invisibility:}
926 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
927 ;; @r{Or respectively:}
928 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
929 @end example
930
931 You can check for invisibility using the following function:
932
933 @defun invisible-p pos-or-prop
934 If @var{pos-or-prop} is a marker or number, this function returns a
935 non-@code{nil} value if the text at that position is invisible.
936
937 If @var{pos-or-prop} is any other kind of Lisp object, that is taken
938 to mean a possible value of the @code{invisible} text or overlay
939 property. In that case, this function returns a non-@code{nil} value
940 if that value would cause text to become invisible, based on the
941 current value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
942 @end defun
943
944 @vindex line-move-ignore-invisible
945 Ordinarily, functions that operate on text or move point do not care
946 whether the text is invisible, they process invisible characters and
947 visible characters alike. The user-level line motion commands,
948 such as @code{next-line}, @code{previous-line}, ignore invisible
949 newlines if @code{line-move-ignore-invisible} is non-@code{nil} (the
950 default), i.e., behave like these invisible newlines didn't exist in
951 the buffer, but only because they are explicitly programmed to do so.
952
953 If a command ends with point inside or at the boundary of
954 invisible text, the main editing loop relocates point to one of the
955 two ends of the invisible text. Emacs chooses the direction of
956 relocation so that it is the same as the overall movement direction of
957 the command; if in doubt, it prefers a position where an inserted char
958 would not inherit the @code{invisible} property. Additionally, if the
959 text is not replaced by an ellipsis and the command only moved within
960 the invisible text, then point is moved one extra character so as to
961 try and reflect the command's movement by a visible movement of the
962 cursor.
963
964 Thus, if the command moved point back to an invisible range (with the usual
965 stickiness), Emacs moves point back to the beginning of that range. If the
966 command moved point forward into an invisible range, Emacs moves point forward
967 to the first visible character that follows the invisible text and then forward
968 one more character.
969
970 These @dfn{adjustments} of point that ended up in the middle of
971 invisible text can be disabled by setting @code{disable-point-adjustment}
972 to a non-@code{nil} value. @xref{Adjusting Point}.
973
974 Incremental search can make invisible overlays visible temporarily
975 and/or permanently when a match includes invisible text. To enable
976 this, the overlay should have a non-@code{nil}
977 @code{isearch-open-invisible} property. The property value should be a
978 function to be called with the overlay as an argument. This function
979 should make the overlay visible permanently; it is used when the match
980 overlaps the overlay on exit from the search.
981
982 During the search, such overlays are made temporarily visible by
983 temporarily modifying their invisible and intangible properties. If you
984 want this to be done differently for a certain overlay, give it an
985 @code{isearch-open-invisible-temporary} property which is a function.
986 The function is called with two arguments: the first is the overlay, and
987 the second is @code{nil} to make the overlay visible, or @code{t} to
988 make it invisible again.
989
990 @node Selective Display
991 @section Selective Display
992 @c @cindex selective display Duplicates selective-display
993
994 @dfn{Selective display} refers to a pair of related features for
995 hiding certain lines on the screen.
996
997 @cindex explicit selective display
998 The first variant, explicit selective display, was designed for use in a Lisp
999 program: it controls which lines are hidden by altering the text. This kind of
1000 hiding is now obsolete; instead you can get the same effect with the
1001 @code{invisible} property (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
1002
1003 In the second variant, the choice of lines to hide is made
1004 automatically based on indentation. This variant is designed to be a
1005 user-level feature.
1006
1007 The way you control explicit selective display is by replacing a
1008 newline (control-j) with a carriage return (control-m). The text that
1009 was formerly a line following that newline is now hidden. Strictly
1010 speaking, it is temporarily no longer a line at all, since only
1011 newlines can separate lines; it is now part of the previous line.
1012
1013 Selective display does not directly affect editing commands. For
1014 example, @kbd{C-f} (@code{forward-char}) moves point unhesitatingly
1015 into hidden text. However, the replacement of newline characters with
1016 carriage return characters affects some editing commands. For
1017 example, @code{next-line} skips hidden lines, since it searches only
1018 for newlines. Modes that use selective display can also define
1019 commands that take account of the newlines, or that control which
1020 parts of the text are hidden.
1021
1022 When you write a selectively displayed buffer into a file, all the
1023 control-m's are output as newlines. This means that when you next read
1024 in the file, it looks OK, with nothing hidden. The selective display
1025 effect is seen only within Emacs.
1026
1027 @defvar selective-display
1028 This buffer-local variable enables selective display. This means that
1029 lines, or portions of lines, may be made hidden.
1030
1031 @itemize @bullet
1032 @item
1033 If the value of @code{selective-display} is @code{t}, then the character
1034 control-m marks the start of hidden text; the control-m, and the rest
1035 of the line following it, are not displayed. This is explicit selective
1036 display.
1037
1038 @item
1039 If the value of @code{selective-display} is a positive integer, then
1040 lines that start with more than that many columns of indentation are not
1041 displayed.
1042 @end itemize
1043
1044 When some portion of a buffer is hidden, the vertical movement
1045 commands operate as if that portion did not exist, allowing a single
1046 @code{next-line} command to skip any number of hidden lines.
1047 However, character movement commands (such as @code{forward-char}) do
1048 not skip the hidden portion, and it is possible (if tricky) to insert
1049 or delete text in an hidden portion.
1050
1051 In the examples below, we show the @emph{display appearance} of the
1052 buffer @code{foo}, which changes with the value of
1053 @code{selective-display}. The @emph{contents} of the buffer do not
1054 change.
1055
1056 @example
1057 @group
1058 (setq selective-display nil)
1059 @result{} nil
1060
1061 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1062 1 on this column
1063 2on this column
1064 3n this column
1065 3n this column
1066 2on this column
1067 1 on this column
1068 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1069 @end group
1070
1071 @group
1072 (setq selective-display 2)
1073 @result{} 2
1074
1075 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1076 1 on this column
1077 2on this column
1078 2on this column
1079 1 on this column
1080 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1081 @end group
1082 @end example
1083 @end defvar
1084
1085 @defopt selective-display-ellipses
1086 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, then Emacs displays
1087 @samp{@dots{}} at the end of a line that is followed by hidden text.
1088 This example is a continuation of the previous one.
1089
1090 @example
1091 @group
1092 (setq selective-display-ellipses t)
1093 @result{} t
1094
1095 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1096 1 on this column
1097 2on this column ...
1098 2on this column
1099 1 on this column
1100 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1101 @end group
1102 @end example
1103
1104 You can use a display table to substitute other text for the ellipsis
1105 (@samp{@dots{}}). @xref{Display Tables}.
1106 @end defopt
1107
1108 @node Temporary Displays
1109 @section Temporary Displays
1110 @cindex temporary display
1111 @cindex temporary buffer display
1112
1113 Temporary displays are used by Lisp programs to put output into a
1114 buffer and then present it to the user for perusal rather than for
1115 editing. Many help commands use this feature.
1116
1117 @defmac with-output-to-temp-buffer buffer-name body@dots{}
1118 This function executes the forms in @var{body} while arranging to insert
1119 any output they print into the buffer named @var{buffer-name}, which is
1120 first created if necessary, and put into Help mode. (See the similar
1121 form @code{with-temp-buffer-window} below.) Finally, the buffer is
1122 displayed in some window, but that window is not selected.
1123
1124 If the forms in @var{body} do not change the major mode in the output
1125 buffer, so that it is still Help mode at the end of their execution,
1126 then @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} makes this buffer read-only at
1127 the end, and also scans it for function and variable names to make them
1128 into clickable cross-references. @xref{Docstring hyperlinks, , Tips for
1129 Documentation Strings}, in particular the item on hyperlinks in
1130 documentation strings, for more details.
1131
1132 The string @var{buffer-name} specifies the temporary buffer, which need
1133 not already exist. The argument must be a string, not a buffer. The
1134 buffer is erased initially (with no questions asked), and it is marked
1135 as unmodified after @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} exits.
1136
1137 @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} binds @code{standard-output} to the
1138 temporary buffer, then it evaluates the forms in @var{body}. Output
1139 using the Lisp output functions within @var{body} goes by default to
1140 that buffer (but screen display and messages in the echo area, although
1141 they are ``output'' in the general sense of the word, are not affected).
1142 @xref{Output Functions}.
1143
1144 Several hooks are available for customizing the behavior
1145 of this construct; they are listed below.
1146
1147 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned.
1148
1149 @example
1150 @group
1151 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1152 This is the contents of foo.
1153 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1154 @end group
1155
1156 @group
1157 (with-output-to-temp-buffer "foo"
1158 (print 20)
1159 (print standard-output))
1160 @result{} #<buffer foo>
1161
1162 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1163
1164 20
1165
1166 #<buffer foo>
1167
1168 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1169 @end group
1170 @end example
1171 @end defmac
1172
1173 @defopt temp-buffer-show-function
1174 If this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}
1175 calls it as a function to do the job of displaying a help buffer. The
1176 function gets one argument, which is the buffer it should display.
1177
1178 It is a good idea for this function to run @code{temp-buffer-show-hook}
1179 just as @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} normally would, inside of
1180 @code{save-selected-window} and with the chosen window and buffer
1181 selected.
1182 @end defopt
1183
1184 @defvar temp-buffer-setup-hook
1185 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} before
1186 evaluating @var{body}. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer is
1187 current. This hook is normally set up with a function to put the
1188 buffer in Help mode.
1189 @end defvar
1190
1191 @defvar temp-buffer-show-hook
1192 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} after
1193 displaying the temporary buffer. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer
1194 is current, and the window it was displayed in is selected.
1195 @end defvar
1196
1197 @defmac with-temp-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function body@dots{}
1198 This macro is similar to @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}. Like that
1199 construct, it executes @var{body} while arranging to insert any output
1200 it prints into the buffer named @var{buffer-or-name} and displays that
1201 buffer in some window. Unlike @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer},
1202 however, it does not automatically switch that buffer to Help mode.
1203
1204 The argument @var{buffer-or-name} specifies the temporary buffer. It
1205 can be either a buffer, which must already exist, or a string, in which
1206 case a buffer of that name is created, if necessary. The buffer is
1207 marked as unmodified and read-only when @code{with-temp-buffer-window}
1208 exits.
1209
1210 This macro does not call @code{temp-buffer-show-function}. Rather, it
1211 passes the @var{action} argument to @code{display-buffer}
1212 (@pxref{Choosing Window}) in order to display the buffer.
1213
1214 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned, unless the
1215 argument @var{quit-function} is specified. In that case, it is called
1216 with two arguments: the window showing the buffer and the result of
1217 @var{body}. The final return value is then whatever @var{quit-function}
1218 returns.
1219
1220 @vindex temp-buffer-window-setup-hook
1221 @vindex temp-buffer-window-show-hook
1222 This macro uses the normal hooks @code{temp-buffer-window-setup-hook}
1223 and @code{temp-buffer-window-show-hook} in place of the analogous hooks
1224 run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}.
1225 @end defmac
1226
1227 The two constructs described next are mostly identical to
1228 @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but differ from it as specified:
1229
1230 @defmac with-current-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1231 This macro is like @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but unlike that makes
1232 the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} current for running
1233 @var{body}.
1234 @end defmac
1235
1236 @defmac with-displayed-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1237 This macro is like @code{with-current-buffer-window} but unlike that
1238 displays the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} @emph{before}
1239 running @var{body}.
1240 @end defmac
1241
1242 A window showing a temporary buffer can be fit to the size of that
1243 buffer using the following mode:
1244
1245 @defopt temp-buffer-resize-mode
1246 When this minor mode is enabled, windows showing a temporary buffer are
1247 automatically resized to fit their buffer's contents.
1248
1249 A window is resized if and only if it has been specially created for the
1250 buffer. In particular, windows that have shown another buffer before
1251 are not resized. By default, this mode uses @code{fit-window-to-buffer}
1252 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) for resizing. You can specify a different
1253 function by customizing the options @code{temp-buffer-max-height} and
1254 @code{temp-buffer-max-width} below.
1255 @end defopt
1256
1257 @defopt temp-buffer-max-height
1258 This option specifies the maximum height (in lines) of a window
1259 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1260 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the height
1261 for such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return
1262 a positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to
1263 be resized is selected.
1264 @end defopt
1265
1266 @defopt temp-buffer-max-width
1267 This option specifies the maximum width of a window (in columns)
1268 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1269 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the width for
1270 such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return a
1271 positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to be
1272 resized is selected.
1273 @end defopt
1274
1275 The following function uses the current buffer for temporal display:
1276
1277 @defun momentary-string-display string position &optional char message
1278 This function momentarily displays @var{string} in the current buffer at
1279 @var{position}. It has no effect on the undo list or on the buffer's
1280 modification status.
1281
1282 The momentary display remains until the next input event. If the next
1283 input event is @var{char}, @code{momentary-string-display} ignores it
1284 and returns. Otherwise, that event remains buffered for subsequent use
1285 as input. Thus, typing @var{char} will simply remove the string from
1286 the display, while typing (say) @kbd{C-f} will remove the string from
1287 the display and later (presumably) move point forward. The argument
1288 @var{char} is a space by default.
1289
1290 The return value of @code{momentary-string-display} is not meaningful.
1291
1292 If the string @var{string} does not contain control characters, you can
1293 do the same job in a more general way by creating (and then subsequently
1294 deleting) an overlay with a @code{before-string} property.
1295 @xref{Overlay Properties}.
1296
1297 If @var{message} is non-@code{nil}, it is displayed in the echo area
1298 while @var{string} is displayed in the buffer. If it is @code{nil}, a
1299 default message says to type @var{char} to continue.
1300
1301 In this example, point is initially located at the beginning of the
1302 second line:
1303
1304 @example
1305 @group
1306 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1307 This is the contents of foo.
1308 @point{}Second line.
1309 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1310 @end group
1311
1312 @group
1313 (momentary-string-display
1314 "**** Important Message! ****"
1315 (point) ?\r
1316 "Type RET when done reading")
1317 @result{} t
1318 @end group
1319
1320 @group
1321 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1322 This is the contents of foo.
1323 **** Important Message! ****Second line.
1324 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1325
1326 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1327 Type RET when done reading
1328 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1329 @end group
1330 @end example
1331 @end defun
1332
1333 @node Overlays
1334 @section Overlays
1335 @cindex overlays
1336 @c FIXME: mention intervals in this section?
1337
1338 You can use @dfn{overlays} to alter the appearance of a buffer's text on
1339 the screen, for the sake of presentation features. An overlay is an
1340 object that belongs to a particular buffer, and has a specified
1341 beginning and end. It also has properties that you can examine and set;
1342 these affect the display of the text within the overlay.
1343
1344 @cindex scalability of overlays
1345 @cindex overlays, scalability
1346 The visual effect of an overlay is the same as of the corresponding
1347 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}). However, due to a different
1348 implementation, overlays generally don't scale well (many operations
1349 take a time that is proportional to the number of overlays in the
1350 buffer). If you need to affect the visual appearance of many portions
1351 in the buffer, we recommend using text properties.
1352
1353 An overlay uses markers to record its beginning and end; thus,
1354 editing the text of the buffer adjusts the beginning and end of each
1355 overlay so that it stays with the text. When you create the overlay,
1356 you can specify whether text inserted at the beginning should be
1357 inside the overlay or outside, and likewise for the end of the overlay.
1358
1359 @menu
1360 * Managing Overlays:: Creating and moving overlays.
1361 * Overlay Properties:: How to read and set properties.
1362 What properties do to the screen display.
1363 * Finding Overlays:: Searching for overlays.
1364 @end menu
1365
1366 @node Managing Overlays
1367 @subsection Managing Overlays
1368 @cindex managing overlays
1369 @cindex overlays, managing
1370
1371 This section describes the functions to create, delete and move
1372 overlays, and to examine their contents. Overlay changes are not
1373 recorded in the buffer's undo list, since the overlays are not
1374 part of the buffer's contents.
1375
1376 @defun overlayp object
1377 This function returns @code{t} if @var{object} is an overlay.
1378 @end defun
1379
1380 @defun make-overlay start end &optional buffer front-advance rear-advance
1381 This function creates and returns an overlay that belongs to
1382 @var{buffer} and ranges from @var{start} to @var{end}. Both @var{start}
1383 and @var{end} must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or
1384 markers. If @var{buffer} is omitted, the overlay is created in the
1385 current buffer.
1386
1387 @cindex empty overlay
1388 @cindex overlay, empty
1389 An overlay whose @var{start} and @var{end} specify the same buffer
1390 position is known as @dfn{empty}. A non-empty overlay can become
1391 empty if the text between its @var{start} and @var{end} is deleted.
1392 When that happens, the overlay is by default not deleted, but you can
1393 cause it to be deleted by giving it the @samp{evaporate} property
1394 (@pxref{Overlay Properties, evaporate property}).
1395
1396 The arguments @var{front-advance} and @var{rear-advance} specify the
1397 marker insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of
1398 the overlay, respectively. @xref{Marker Insertion Types}. If they
1399 are both @code{nil}, the default, then the overlay extends to include
1400 any text inserted at the beginning, but not text inserted at the end.
1401 If @var{front-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the
1402 beginning of the overlay is excluded from the overlay. If
1403 @var{rear-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the end of the
1404 overlay is included in the overlay.
1405 @end defun
1406
1407 @defun overlay-start overlay
1408 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} starts,
1409 as an integer.
1410 @end defun
1411
1412 @defun overlay-end overlay
1413 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} ends,
1414 as an integer.
1415 @end defun
1416
1417 @defun overlay-buffer overlay
1418 This function returns the buffer that @var{overlay} belongs to. It
1419 returns @code{nil} if @var{overlay} has been deleted.
1420 @end defun
1421
1422 @defun delete-overlay overlay
1423 This function deletes @var{overlay}. The overlay continues to exist as
1424 a Lisp object, and its property list is unchanged, but it ceases to be
1425 attached to the buffer it belonged to, and ceases to have any effect on
1426 display.
1427
1428 A deleted overlay is not permanently disconnected. You can give it a
1429 position in a buffer again by calling @code{move-overlay}.
1430 @end defun
1431
1432 @defun move-overlay overlay start end &optional buffer
1433 This function moves @var{overlay} to @var{buffer}, and places its bounds
1434 at @var{start} and @var{end}. Both arguments @var{start} and @var{end}
1435 must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or markers.
1436
1437 If @var{buffer} is omitted, @var{overlay} stays in the same buffer it
1438 was already associated with; if @var{overlay} was deleted, it goes into
1439 the current buffer.
1440
1441 The return value is @var{overlay}.
1442
1443 This is the only valid way to change the endpoints of an overlay. Do
1444 not try modifying the markers in the overlay by hand, as that fails to
1445 update other vital data structures and can cause some overlays to be
1446 lost.
1447 @end defun
1448
1449 @defun remove-overlays &optional start end name value
1450 This function removes all the overlays between @var{start} and
1451 @var{end} whose property @var{name} has the value @var{value}. It can
1452 move the endpoints of the overlays in the region, or split them.
1453
1454 If @var{name} is omitted or @code{nil}, it means to delete all overlays in
1455 the specified region. If @var{start} and/or @var{end} are omitted or
1456 @code{nil}, that means the beginning and end of the buffer respectively.
1457 Therefore, @code{(remove-overlays)} removes all the overlays in the
1458 current buffer.
1459 @end defun
1460
1461 @defun copy-overlay overlay
1462 This function returns a copy of @var{overlay}. The copy has the same
1463 endpoints and properties as @var{overlay}. However, the marker
1464 insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of the
1465 overlay are set to their default values (@pxref{Marker Insertion
1466 Types}).
1467 @end defun
1468
1469 Here are some examples:
1470
1471 @example
1472 ;; @r{Create an overlay.}
1473 (setq foo (make-overlay 1 10))
1474 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 10 in display.texi>
1475 (overlay-start foo)
1476 @result{} 1
1477 (overlay-end foo)
1478 @result{} 10
1479 (overlay-buffer foo)
1480 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1481 ;; @r{Give it a property we can check later.}
1482 (overlay-put foo 'happy t)
1483 @result{} t
1484 ;; @r{Verify the property is present.}
1485 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1486 @result{} t
1487 ;; @r{Move the overlay.}
1488 (move-overlay foo 5 20)
1489 @result{} #<overlay from 5 to 20 in display.texi>
1490 (overlay-start foo)
1491 @result{} 5
1492 (overlay-end foo)
1493 @result{} 20
1494 ;; @r{Delete the overlay.}
1495 (delete-overlay foo)
1496 @result{} nil
1497 ;; @r{Verify it is deleted.}
1498 foo
1499 @result{} #<overlay in no buffer>
1500 ;; @r{A deleted overlay has no position.}
1501 (overlay-start foo)
1502 @result{} nil
1503 (overlay-end foo)
1504 @result{} nil
1505 (overlay-buffer foo)
1506 @result{} nil
1507 ;; @r{Undelete the overlay.}
1508 (move-overlay foo 1 20)
1509 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 20 in display.texi>
1510 ;; @r{Verify the results.}
1511 (overlay-start foo)
1512 @result{} 1
1513 (overlay-end foo)
1514 @result{} 20
1515 (overlay-buffer foo)
1516 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1517 ;; @r{Moving and deleting the overlay does not change its properties.}
1518 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1519 @result{} t
1520 @end example
1521
1522 Emacs stores the overlays of each buffer in two lists, divided
1523 around an arbitrary center position. One list extends backwards
1524 through the buffer from that center position, and the other extends
1525 forwards from that center position. The center position can be anywhere
1526 in the buffer.
1527
1528 @defun overlay-recenter pos
1529 This function recenters the overlays of the current buffer around
1530 position @var{pos}. That makes overlay lookup faster for positions
1531 near @var{pos}, but slower for positions far away from @var{pos}.
1532 @end defun
1533
1534 A loop that scans the buffer forwards, creating overlays, can run
1535 faster if you do @code{(overlay-recenter (point-max))} first.
1536
1537 @node Overlay Properties
1538 @subsection Overlay Properties
1539 @cindex overlay properties
1540
1541 Overlay properties are like text properties in that the properties that
1542 alter how a character is displayed can come from either source. But in
1543 most respects they are different. @xref{Text Properties}, for comparison.
1544
1545 Text properties are considered a part of the text; overlays and
1546 their properties are specifically considered not to be part of the
1547 text. Thus, copying text between various buffers and strings
1548 preserves text properties, but does not try to preserve overlays.
1549 Changing a buffer's text properties marks the buffer as modified,
1550 while moving an overlay or changing its properties does not. Unlike
1551 text property changes, overlay property changes are not recorded in
1552 the buffer's undo list.
1553
1554 Since more than one overlay can specify a property value for the
1555 same character, Emacs lets you specify a priority value of each
1556 overlay. In case two overlays have the same priority value, and one
1557 is nested in the other, then the inner one will have priority over the
1558 outer one. If neither is nested in the other then you should not make
1559 assumptions about which overlay will prevail.
1560
1561 These functions read and set the properties of an overlay:
1562
1563 @defun overlay-get overlay prop
1564 This function returns the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1565 @var{overlay}, if any. If @var{overlay} does not record any value for
1566 that property, but it does have a @code{category} property which is a
1567 symbol, that symbol's @var{prop} property is used. Otherwise, the value
1568 is @code{nil}.
1569 @end defun
1570
1571 @defun overlay-put overlay prop value
1572 This function sets the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1573 @var{overlay} to @var{value}. It returns @var{value}.
1574 @end defun
1575
1576 @defun overlay-properties overlay
1577 This returns a copy of the property list of @var{overlay}.
1578 @end defun
1579
1580 See also the function @code{get-char-property} which checks both
1581 overlay properties and text properties for a given character.
1582 @xref{Examining Properties}.
1583
1584 Many overlay properties have special meanings; here is a table
1585 of them:
1586
1587 @table @code
1588 @item priority
1589 @kindex priority @r{(overlay property)}
1590 This property's value determines the priority of the overlay.
1591 If you want to specify a priority value, use either @code{nil}
1592 (or zero), or a positive integer. Any other value has undefined behavior.
1593
1594 The priority matters when two or more overlays cover the same
1595 character and both specify the same property; the one whose
1596 @code{priority} value is larger overrides the other. For the
1597 @code{face} property, the higher priority overlay's value does not
1598 completely override the other value; instead, its face attributes
1599 override the face attributes of the lower priority @code{face}
1600 property.
1601
1602 Currently, all overlays take priority over text properties.
1603
1604 Note that Emacs sometimes uses non-numeric priority values for some of
1605 its internal overlays, so do not try to do arithmetic on the
1606 priority of an overlay (unless it is one that you created). If you
1607 need to put overlays in priority order, use the @var{sorted} argument
1608 of @code{overlays-at}. @xref{Finding Overlays}.
1609
1610 @item window
1611 @kindex window @r{(overlay property)}
1612 If the @code{window} property is non-@code{nil}, then the overlay
1613 applies only on that window.
1614
1615 @item category
1616 @kindex category @r{(overlay property)}
1617 If an overlay has a @code{category} property, we call it the
1618 @dfn{category} of the overlay. It should be a symbol. The properties
1619 of the symbol serve as defaults for the properties of the overlay.
1620
1621 @item face
1622 @kindex face @r{(overlay property)}
1623 This property controls the appearance of the text (@pxref{Faces}).
1624 The value of the property can be the following:
1625
1626 @itemize @bullet
1627 @item
1628 A face name (a symbol or string).
1629
1630 @item
1631 An anonymous face: a property list of the form @code{(@var{keyword}
1632 @var{value} @dots{})}, where each @var{keyword} is a face attribute
1633 name and @var{value} is a value for that attribute.
1634
1635 @item
1636 A list of faces. Each list element should be either a face name or an
1637 anonymous face. This specifies a face which is an aggregate of the
1638 attributes of each of the listed faces. Faces occurring earlier in
1639 the list have higher priority.
1640
1641 @item
1642 A cons cell of the form @code{(foreground-color . @var{color-name})}
1643 or @code{(background-color . @var{color-name})}. This specifies the
1644 foreground or background color, similar to @code{(:foreground
1645 @var{color-name})} or @code{(:background @var{color-name})}. This
1646 form is supported for backward compatibility only, and should be
1647 avoided.
1648 @end itemize
1649
1650 @item mouse-face
1651 @kindex mouse-face @r{(overlay property)}
1652 This property is used instead of @code{face} when the mouse is within
1653 the range of the overlay. However, Emacs ignores all face attributes
1654 from this property that alter the text size (e.g., @code{:height},
1655 @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}). Those attributes are always the
1656 same as in the unhighlighted text.
1657
1658 @item display
1659 @kindex display @r{(overlay property)}
1660 This property activates various features that change the
1661 way text is displayed. For example, it can make text appear taller
1662 or shorter, higher or lower, wider or narrower, or replaced with an image.
1663 @xref{Display Property}.
1664
1665 @item help-echo
1666 @kindex help-echo @r{(overlay property)}
1667 If an overlay has a @code{help-echo} property, then when you move the
1668 mouse onto the text in the overlay, Emacs displays a help string in the
1669 echo area, or in the tooltip window. For details see @ref{Text
1670 help-echo}.
1671
1672 @item field
1673 @kindex field @r{(overlay property)}
1674 @c Copied from Special Properties.
1675 Consecutive characters with the same @code{field} property constitute a
1676 @emph{field}. Some motion functions including @code{forward-word} and
1677 @code{beginning-of-line} stop moving at a field boundary.
1678 @xref{Fields}.
1679
1680 @item modification-hooks
1681 @kindex modification-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1682 This property's value is a list of functions to be called if any
1683 character within the overlay is changed or if text is inserted strictly
1684 within the overlay.
1685
1686 The hook functions are called both before and after each change.
1687 If the functions save the information they receive, and compare notes
1688 between calls, they can determine exactly what change has been made
1689 in the buffer text.
1690
1691 When called before a change, each function receives four arguments: the
1692 overlay, @code{nil}, and the beginning and end of the text range to be
1693 modified.
1694
1695 When called after a change, each function receives five arguments: the
1696 overlay, @code{t}, the beginning and end of the text range just
1697 modified, and the length of the pre-change text replaced by that range.
1698 (For an insertion, the pre-change length is zero; for a deletion, that
1699 length is the number of characters deleted, and the post-change
1700 beginning and end are equal.)
1701
1702 If these functions modify the buffer, they should bind
1703 @code{inhibit-modification-hooks} to @code{t} around doing so, to
1704 avoid confusing the internal mechanism that calls these hooks.
1705
1706 Text properties also support the @code{modification-hooks} property,
1707 but the details are somewhat different (@pxref{Special Properties}).
1708
1709 @item insert-in-front-hooks
1710 @kindex insert-in-front-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1711 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1712 after inserting text right at the beginning of the overlay. The calling
1713 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1714
1715 @item insert-behind-hooks
1716 @kindex insert-behind-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1717 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1718 after inserting text right at the end of the overlay. The calling
1719 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1720
1721 @item invisible
1722 @kindex invisible @r{(overlay property)}
1723 The @code{invisible} property can make the text in the overlay
1724 invisible, which means that it does not appear on the screen.
1725 @xref{Invisible Text}, for details.
1726
1727 @item intangible
1728 @kindex intangible @r{(overlay property)}
1729 The @code{intangible} property on an overlay works just like the
1730 @code{intangible} text property. It is obsolete. @xref{Special
1731 Properties}, for details.
1732
1733 @item isearch-open-invisible
1734 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1735 visible, permanently, if the final match overlaps it. @xref{Invisible
1736 Text}.
1737
1738 @item isearch-open-invisible-temporary
1739 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1740 visible, temporarily, during the search. @xref{Invisible Text}.
1741
1742 @item before-string
1743 @kindex before-string @r{(overlay property)}
1744 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the beginning
1745 of the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1746 sense---only on the screen.
1747
1748 @item after-string
1749 @kindex after-string @r{(overlay property)}
1750 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the end of
1751 the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1752 sense---only on the screen.
1753
1754 @item line-prefix
1755 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each
1756 non-continuation line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1757
1758 @item wrap-prefix
1759 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each continuation
1760 line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1761
1762 @item evaporate
1763 @kindex evaporate @r{(overlay property)}
1764 If this property is non-@code{nil}, the overlay is deleted automatically
1765 if it becomes empty (i.e., if its length becomes zero). If you give
1766 an empty overlay (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) a
1767 non-@code{nil} @code{evaporate} property, that deletes it immediately.
1768 Note that, unless an overlay has this property, it will not be deleted
1769 when the text between its starting and ending positions is deleted
1770 from the buffer.
1771
1772 @item keymap
1773 @cindex keymap of character (and overlays)
1774 @kindex keymap @r{(overlay property)}
1775 If this property is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a keymap for a portion of the
1776 text. This keymap is used when the character after point is within the
1777 overlay, and takes precedence over most other keymaps. @xref{Active Keymaps}.
1778
1779 @item local-map
1780 @kindex local-map @r{(overlay property)}
1781 The @code{local-map} property is similar to @code{keymap} but replaces the
1782 buffer's local map rather than augmenting existing keymaps. This also means it
1783 has lower precedence than minor mode keymaps.
1784 @end table
1785
1786 The @code{keymap} and @code{local-map} properties do not affect a
1787 string displayed by the @code{before-string}, @code{after-string}, or
1788 @code{display} properties. This is only relevant for mouse clicks and
1789 other mouse events that fall on the string, since point is never on
1790 the string. To bind special mouse events for the string, assign it a
1791 @code{keymap} or @code{local-map} text property. @xref{Special
1792 Properties}.
1793
1794 @node Finding Overlays
1795 @subsection Searching for Overlays
1796 @cindex searching for overlays
1797 @cindex overlays, searching for
1798
1799 @defun overlays-at pos &optional sorted
1800 This function returns a list of all the overlays that cover the character at
1801 position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If @var{sorted} is non-@code{nil},
1802 the list is in decreasing order of priority, otherwise it is in no particular
1803 order. An overlay contains position @var{pos} if it begins at or before
1804 @var{pos}, and ends after @var{pos}.
1805
1806 To illustrate usage, here is a Lisp function that returns a list of the
1807 overlays that specify property @var{prop} for the character at point:
1808
1809 @smallexample
1810 (defun find-overlays-specifying (prop)
1811 (let ((overlays (overlays-at (point)))
1812 found)
1813 (while overlays
1814 (let ((overlay (car overlays)))
1815 (if (overlay-get overlay prop)
1816 (setq found (cons overlay found))))
1817 (setq overlays (cdr overlays)))
1818 found))
1819 @end smallexample
1820 @end defun
1821
1822 @defun overlays-in beg end
1823 This function returns a list of the overlays that overlap the region
1824 @var{beg} through @var{end}. An overlay overlaps with a region if it
1825 contains one or more characters in the region; empty overlays
1826 (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) overlap if they are at
1827 @var{beg}, strictly between @var{beg} and @var{end}, or at @var{end}
1828 when @var{end} denotes the position at the end of the buffer.
1829 @end defun
1830
1831 @defun next-overlay-change pos
1832 This function returns the buffer position of the next beginning or end
1833 of an overlay, after @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1834 @code{(point-max)}.
1835 @end defun
1836
1837 @defun previous-overlay-change pos
1838 This function returns the buffer position of the previous beginning or
1839 end of an overlay, before @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1840 @code{(point-min)}.
1841 @end defun
1842
1843 As an example, here's a simplified (and inefficient) version of the
1844 primitive function @code{next-single-char-property-change}
1845 (@pxref{Property Search}). It searches forward from position
1846 @var{pos} for the next position where the value of a given property
1847 @code{prop}, as obtained from either overlays or text properties,
1848 changes.
1849
1850 @smallexample
1851 (defun next-single-char-property-change (position prop)
1852 (save-excursion
1853 (goto-char position)
1854 (let ((propval (get-char-property (point) prop)))
1855 (while (and (not (eobp))
1856 (eq (get-char-property (point) prop) propval))
1857 (goto-char (min (next-overlay-change (point))
1858 (next-single-property-change (point) prop)))))
1859 (point)))
1860 @end smallexample
1861
1862 @node Size of Displayed Text
1863 @section Size of Displayed Text
1864 @cindex size of text on display
1865 @cindex character width on display
1866
1867 Since not all characters have the same width, these functions let you
1868 check the width of a character. @xref{Primitive Indent}, and
1869 @ref{Screen Lines}, for related functions.
1870
1871 @defun char-width char
1872 This function returns the width in columns of the character
1873 @var{char}, if it were displayed in the current buffer (i.e., taking
1874 into account the buffer's display table, if any; @pxref{Display
1875 Tables}). The width of a tab character is usually @code{tab-width}
1876 (@pxref{Usual Display}).
1877 @end defun
1878
1879 @defun string-width string
1880 This function returns the width in columns of the string @var{string},
1881 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
1882 @end defun
1883
1884 @defun truncate-string-to-width string width &optional start-column padding ellipsis
1885 This function returns the part of @var{string} that fits within
1886 @var{width} columns, as a new string.
1887
1888 If @var{string} does not reach @var{width}, then the result ends where
1889 @var{string} ends. If one multi-column character in @var{string}
1890 extends across the column @var{width}, that character is not included in
1891 the result. Thus, the result can fall short of @var{width} but cannot
1892 go beyond it.
1893
1894 The optional argument @var{start-column} specifies the starting column.
1895 If this is non-@code{nil}, then the first @var{start-column} columns of
1896 the string are omitted from the value. If one multi-column character in
1897 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}, that
1898 character is not included.
1899
1900 The optional argument @var{padding}, if non-@code{nil}, is a padding
1901 character added at the beginning and end of the result string, to extend
1902 it to exactly @var{width} columns. The padding character is used at the
1903 end of the result if it falls short of @var{width}. It is also used at
1904 the beginning of the result if one multi-column character in
1905 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}.
1906
1907 @vindex truncate-string-ellipsis
1908 If @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil}, it should be a string which will
1909 replace the end of @var{string} (including any padding) if it extends
1910 beyond @var{width}, unless the display width of @var{string} is equal
1911 to or less than the display width of @var{ellipsis}. If
1912 @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil} and not a string, it stands for
1913 the value of the variable @code{truncate-string-ellipsis}.
1914
1915 @example
1916 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4)
1917 @result{} "ab"
1918 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4 ?\s)
1919 @result{} " ab "
1920 @end example
1921 @end defun
1922
1923 The following function returns the size in pixels of text as if it were
1924 displayed in a given window. This function is used by
1925 @code{fit-window-to-buffer} and @code{fit-frame-to-buffer}
1926 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) to make a window exactly as large as the text
1927 it contains.
1928
1929 @defun window-text-pixel-size &optional window from to x-limit y-limit mode-and-header-line
1930 This function returns the size of the text of @var{window}'s buffer in
1931 pixels. @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected
1932 one. The return value is a cons of the maximum pixel-width of any text
1933 line and the maximum pixel-height of all text lines.
1934
1935 The optional argument @var{from}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the first
1936 text position to consider and defaults to the minimum accessible
1937 position of the buffer. If @var{from} is @code{t}, it uses the minimum
1938 accessible position that is not a newline character. The optional
1939 argument @var{to}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the last text position
1940 to consider and defaults to the maximum accessible position of the
1941 buffer. If @var{to} is @code{t}, it uses the maximum accessible
1942 position that is not a newline character.
1943
1944 The optional argument @var{x-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1945 maximum pixel-width that can be returned. @var{x-limit} @code{nil} or
1946 omitted, means to use the pixel-width of @var{window}'s body
1947 (@pxref{Window Sizes}); this is useful when the caller does not intend
1948 to change the width of @var{window}. Otherwise, the caller should
1949 specify here the maximum width @var{window}'s body may assume. Text
1950 whose x-coordinate is beyond @var{x-limit} is ignored. Since
1951 calculating the width of long lines can take some time, it's always a
1952 good idea to make this argument as small as needed; in particular, if
1953 the buffer might contain long lines that will be truncated anyway.
1954
1955 The optional argument @var{y-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1956 maximum pixel-height that can be returned. Text lines whose
1957 y-coordinate is beyond @var{y-limit} are ignored. Since calculating the
1958 pixel-height of a large buffer can take some time, it makes sense to
1959 specify this argument; in particular, if the caller does not know the
1960 size of the buffer.
1961
1962 The optional argument @var{mode-and-header-line} @code{nil} or omitted
1963 means to not include the height of the mode- or header-line of
1964 @var{window} in the return value. If it is either the symbol
1965 @code{mode-line} or @code{header-line}, include only the height of that
1966 line, if present, in the return value. If it is @code{t}, include the
1967 height of both, if present, in the return value.
1968 @end defun
1969
1970
1971 @node Line Height
1972 @section Line Height
1973 @cindex line height
1974 @cindex height of a line
1975
1976 The total height of each display line consists of the height of the
1977 contents of the line, plus optional additional vertical line spacing
1978 above or below the display line.
1979
1980 The height of the line contents is the maximum height of any character
1981 or image on that display line, including the final newline if there is
1982 one. (A display line that is continued doesn't include a final
1983 newline.) That is the default line height, if you do nothing to specify
1984 a greater height. (In the most common case, this equals the height of
1985 the corresponding frame's default font, see @ref{Frame Font}.)
1986
1987 There are several ways to explicitly specify a larger line height,
1988 either by specifying an absolute height for the display line, or by
1989 specifying vertical space. However, no matter what you specify, the
1990 actual line height can never be less than the default.
1991
1992 @kindex line-height @r{(text property)}
1993 A newline can have a @code{line-height} text or overlay property
1994 that controls the total height of the display line ending in that
1995 newline.
1996
1997 If the property value is @code{t}, the newline character has no
1998 effect on the displayed height of the line---the visible contents
1999 alone determine the height. This is useful for tiling small images
2000 (or image slices) without adding blank areas between the images.
2001
2002 If the property value is a list of the form @code{(@var{height}
2003 @var{total})}, that adds extra space @emph{below} the display line.
2004 First Emacs uses @var{height} as a height spec to control extra space
2005 @emph{above} the line; then it adds enough space @emph{below} the line
2006 to bring the total line height up to @var{total}. In this case, the
2007 other ways to specify the line spacing are ignored.
2008
2009 @cindex height spec
2010 Any other kind of property value is a height spec, which translates
2011 into a number---the specified line height. There are several ways to
2012 write a height spec; here's how each of them translates into a number:
2013
2014 @table @code
2015 @item @var{integer}
2016 If the height spec is a positive integer, the height value is that integer.
2017 @item @var{float}
2018 If the height spec is a float, @var{float}, the numeric height value
2019 is @var{float} times the frame's default line height.
2020 @item (@var{face} . @var{ratio})
2021 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2022 is @var{ratio} times the height of face @var{face}. @var{ratio} can
2023 be any type of number, or @code{nil} which means a ratio of 1.
2024 If @var{face} is @code{t}, it refers to the current face.
2025 @item (nil . @var{ratio})
2026 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2027 is @var{ratio} times the height of the contents of the line.
2028 @end table
2029
2030 Thus, any valid height spec determines the height in pixels, one way
2031 or another. If the line contents' height is less than that, Emacs
2032 adds extra vertical space above the line to achieve the specified
2033 total height.
2034
2035 If you don't specify the @code{line-height} property, the line's
2036 height consists of the contents' height plus the line spacing.
2037 There are several ways to specify the line spacing for different
2038 parts of Emacs text.
2039
2040 On graphical terminals, you can specify the line spacing for all
2041 lines in a frame, using the @code{line-spacing} frame parameter
2042 (@pxref{Layout Parameters}). However, if the default value of
2043 @code{line-spacing} is non-@code{nil}, it overrides the
2044 frame's @code{line-spacing} parameter. An integer specifies the
2045 number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number specifies
2046 the spacing relative to the frame's default line height.
2047
2048 @vindex line-spacing
2049 You can specify the line spacing for all lines in a buffer via the
2050 buffer-local @code{line-spacing} variable. An integer specifies
2051 the number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number
2052 specifies the spacing relative to the default frame line height. This
2053 overrides line spacings specified for the frame.
2054
2055 @kindex line-spacing @r{(text property)}
2056 Finally, a newline can have a @code{line-spacing} text or overlay
2057 property that overrides the default frame line spacing and the buffer
2058 local @code{line-spacing} variable, for the display line ending in
2059 that newline.
2060
2061 One way or another, these mechanisms specify a Lisp value for the
2062 spacing of each line. The value is a height spec, and it translates
2063 into a Lisp value as described above. However, in this case the
2064 numeric height value specifies the line spacing, rather than the line
2065 height.
2066
2067 On text terminals, the line spacing cannot be altered.
2068
2069 @node Faces
2070 @section Faces
2071 @cindex faces
2072
2073 A @dfn{face} is a collection of graphical attributes for displaying
2074 text: font, foreground color, background color, optional underlining,
2075 etc. Faces control how Emacs displays text in buffers, as well as
2076 other parts of the frame such as the mode line.
2077
2078 @cindex anonymous face
2079 One way to represent a face is as a property list of attributes,
2080 like @code{(:foreground "red" :weight bold)}. Such a list is called
2081 an @dfn{anonymous face}. For example, you can assign an anonymous
2082 face as the value of the @code{face} text property, and Emacs will
2083 display the underlying text with the specified attributes.
2084 @xref{Special Properties}.
2085
2086 @cindex face name
2087 More commonly, a face is referred to via a @dfn{face name}: a Lisp
2088 symbol associated with a set of face attributes@footnote{For backward
2089 compatibility, you can also use a string to specify a face name; that
2090 is equivalent to a Lisp symbol with the same name.}. Named faces are
2091 defined using the @code{defface} macro (@pxref{Defining Faces}).
2092 Emacs comes with several standard named faces (@pxref{Basic Faces}).
2093
2094 Many parts of Emacs required named faces, and do not accept
2095 anonymous faces. These include the functions documented in
2096 @ref{Attribute Functions}, and the variable @code{font-lock-keywords}
2097 (@pxref{Search-based Fontification}). Unless otherwise stated, we
2098 will use the term @dfn{face} to refer only to named faces.
2099
2100 @defun facep object
2101 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if @var{object} is a
2102 named face: a Lisp symbol or string which serves as a face name.
2103 Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2104 @end defun
2105
2106 @menu
2107 * Face Attributes:: What is in a face?
2108 * Defining Faces:: How to define a face.
2109 * Attribute Functions:: Functions to examine and set face attributes.
2110 * Displaying Faces:: How Emacs combines the faces specified for a character.
2111 * Face Remapping:: Remapping faces to alternative definitions.
2112 * Face Functions:: How to define and examine faces.
2113 * Auto Faces:: Hook for automatic face assignment.
2114 * Basic Faces:: Faces that are defined by default.
2115 * Font Selection:: Finding the best available font for a face.
2116 * Font Lookup:: Looking up the names of available fonts
2117 and information about them.
2118 * Fontsets:: A fontset is a collection of fonts
2119 that handle a range of character sets.
2120 * Low-Level Font:: Lisp representation for character display fonts.
2121 @end menu
2122
2123 @node Face Attributes
2124 @subsection Face Attributes
2125 @cindex face attributes
2126
2127 @dfn{Face attributes} determine the visual appearance of a face.
2128 The following table lists all the face attributes, their possible
2129 values, and their effects.
2130
2131 Apart from the values given below, each face attribute can have the
2132 value @code{unspecified}. This special value means that the face
2133 doesn't specify that attribute directly. An @code{unspecified}
2134 attribute tells Emacs to refer instead to a parent face (see the
2135 description @code{:inherit} attribute below); or, failing that, to an
2136 underlying face (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). The @code{default} face
2137 must specify all attributes.
2138
2139 Some of these attributes are meaningful only on certain kinds of
2140 displays. If your display cannot handle a certain attribute, the
2141 attribute is ignored.
2142
2143 @table @code
2144 @item :family
2145 Font family or fontset (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU
2146 Emacs Manual}, for more information about font families. The function
2147 @code{font-family-list} (see below) returns a list of available family
2148 names. @xref{Fontsets}, for information about fontsets.
2149
2150 @item :foundry
2151 The name of the @dfn{font foundry} for the font family specified by
2152 the @code{:family} attribute (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
2153 GNU Emacs Manual}.
2154
2155 @item :width
2156 Relative character width. This should be one of the symbols
2157 @code{ultra-condensed}, @code{extra-condensed}, @code{condensed},
2158 @code{semi-condensed}, @code{normal}, @code{semi-expanded},
2159 @code{expanded}, @code{extra-expanded}, or @code{ultra-expanded}.
2160
2161 @item :height
2162 The height of the font. In the simplest case, this is an integer in
2163 units of 1/10 point.
2164
2165 The value can also be floating point or a function, which
2166 specifies the height relative to an @dfn{underlying face}
2167 (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). A floating-point value
2168 specifies the amount by which to scale the height of the
2169 underlying face. A function value is called
2170 with one argument, the height of the underlying face, and returns the
2171 height of the new face. If the function is passed an integer
2172 argument, it must return an integer.
2173
2174 The height of the default face must be specified using an integer;
2175 floating point and function values are not allowed.
2176
2177 @item :weight
2178 Font weight---one of the symbols (from densest to faintest)
2179 @code{ultra-bold}, @code{extra-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{semi-bold},
2180 @code{normal}, @code{semi-light}, @code{light}, @code{extra-light}, or
2181 @code{ultra-light}. On text terminals which support
2182 variable-brightness text, any weight greater than normal is displayed
2183 as extra bright, and any weight less than normal is displayed as
2184 half-bright.
2185
2186 @cindex italic text
2187 @item :slant
2188 Font slant---one of the symbols @code{italic}, @code{oblique},
2189 @code{normal}, @code{reverse-italic}, or @code{reverse-oblique}. On
2190 text terminals that support variable-brightness text, slanted text is
2191 displayed as half-bright.
2192
2193 @item :foreground
2194 Foreground color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2195 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}. On
2196 black-and-white displays, certain shades of gray are implemented by
2197 stipple patterns.
2198
2199 @item :distant-foreground
2200 Alternative foreground color, a string. This is like @code{:foreground}
2201 but the color is only used as a foreground when the background color is
2202 near to the foreground that would have been used. This is useful for
2203 example when marking text (i.e., the region face). If the text has a foreground
2204 that is visible with the region face, that foreground is used.
2205 If the foreground is near the region face background,
2206 @code{:distant-foreground} is used instead so the text is readable.
2207
2208 @item :background
2209 Background color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2210 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}.
2211
2212 @cindex underlined text
2213 @item :underline
2214 Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what
2215 way. The possible values of the @code{:underline} attribute are:
2216
2217 @table @asis
2218 @item @code{nil}
2219 Don't underline.
2220
2221 @item @code{t}
2222 Underline with the foreground color of the face.
2223
2224 @item @var{color}
2225 Underline in color @var{color}, a string specifying a color.
2226
2227 @item @code{(:color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2228 @var{color} is either a string, or the symbol @code{foreground-color},
2229 meaning the foreground color of the face. Omitting the attribute
2230 @code{:color} means to use the foreground color of the face.
2231 @var{style} should be a symbol @code{line} or @code{wave}, meaning to
2232 use a straight or wavy line. Omitting the attribute @code{:style}
2233 means to use a straight line.
2234 @end table
2235
2236 @cindex overlined text
2237 @item :overline
2238 Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2239 If the value is @code{t}, overlining uses the foreground color of the
2240 face. If the value is a string, overlining uses that color. The
2241 value @code{nil} means do not overline.
2242
2243 @cindex strike-through text
2244 @item :strike-through
2245 Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2246 color. The value is used like that of @code{:overline}.
2247
2248 @cindex 2D box
2249 @cindex 3D box
2250 @item :box
2251 Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its color, the
2252 width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. Here are the possible
2253 values of the @code{:box} attribute, and what they mean:
2254
2255 @table @asis
2256 @item @code{nil}
2257 Don't draw a box.
2258
2259 @item @code{t}
2260 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in the foreground color.
2261
2262 @item @var{color}
2263 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in color @var{color}.
2264
2265 @item @code{(:line-width @var{width} :color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2266 This way you can explicitly specify all aspects of the box. The value
2267 @var{width} specifies the width of the lines to draw; it defaults to
2268 1. A negative width @var{-n} means to draw a line of width @var{n}
2269 that occupies the space of the underlying text, thus avoiding any
2270 increase in the character height or width.
2271
2272 The value @var{color} specifies the color to draw with. The default is
2273 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2274 color of the face for 3D boxes.
2275
2276 The value @var{style} specifies whether to draw a 3D box. If it is
2277 @code{released-button}, the box looks like a 3D button that is not being
2278 pressed. If it is @code{pressed-button}, the box looks like a 3D button
2279 that is being pressed. If it is @code{nil} or omitted, a plain 2D box
2280 is used.
2281 @end table
2282
2283 @item :inverse-video
2284 Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. The
2285 value should be @code{t} (yes) or @code{nil} (no).
2286
2287 @item :stipple
2288 The background stipple, a bitmap.
2289
2290 The value can be a string; that should be the name of a file containing
2291 external-format X bitmap data. The file is found in the directories
2292 listed in the variable @code{x-bitmap-file-path}.
2293
2294 Alternatively, the value can specify the bitmap directly, with a list
2295 of the form @code{(@var{width} @var{height} @var{data})}. Here,
2296 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the size in pixels, and
2297 @var{data} is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap, row by
2298 row. Each row occupies @math{(@var{width} + 7) / 8} consecutive bytes
2299 in the string (which should be a unibyte string for best results).
2300 This means that each row always occupies at least one whole byte.
2301
2302 If the value is @code{nil}, that means use no stipple pattern.
2303
2304 Normally you do not need to set the stipple attribute, because it is
2305 used automatically to handle certain shades of gray.
2306
2307 @item :font
2308 The font used to display the face. Its value should be a font object.
2309 @xref{Low-Level Font}, for information about font objects, font specs,
2310 and font entities.
2311
2312 When specifying this attribute using @code{set-face-attribute}
2313 (@pxref{Attribute Functions}), you may also supply a font spec, a font
2314 entity, or a string. Emacs converts such values to an appropriate
2315 font object, and stores that font object as the actual attribute
2316 value. If you specify a string, the contents of the string should be
2317 a font name (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}); if the
2318 font name is an XLFD containing wildcards, Emacs chooses the first
2319 font matching those wildcards. Specifying this attribute also changes
2320 the values of the @code{:family}, @code{:foundry}, @code{:width},
2321 @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant} attributes.
2322
2323 @cindex inheritance, for faces
2324 @item :inherit
2325 The name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list of face
2326 names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face like
2327 an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying
2328 faces (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). If a list of faces is used,
2329 attributes from faces earlier in the list override those from later
2330 faces.
2331 @end table
2332
2333 @defun font-family-list &optional frame
2334 This function returns a list of available font family names. The
2335 optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on which the text is
2336 to be displayed; if it is @code{nil}, the selected frame is used.
2337 @end defun
2338
2339 @defopt underline-minimum-offset
2340 This variable specifies the minimum distance between the baseline and
2341 the underline, in pixels, when displaying underlined text.
2342 @end defopt
2343
2344 @defopt x-bitmap-file-path
2345 This variable specifies a list of directories for searching
2346 for bitmap files, for the @code{:stipple} attribute.
2347 @end defopt
2348
2349 @defun bitmap-spec-p object
2350 This returns @code{t} if @var{object} is a valid bitmap specification,
2351 suitable for use with @code{:stipple} (see above). It returns
2352 @code{nil} otherwise.
2353 @end defun
2354
2355 @node Defining Faces
2356 @subsection Defining Faces
2357 @cindex defining faces
2358
2359 @cindex face spec
2360 The usual way to define a face is through the @code{defface} macro.
2361 This macro associates a face name (a symbol) with a default @dfn{face
2362 spec}. A face spec is a construct which specifies what attributes a
2363 face should have on any given terminal; for example, a face spec might
2364 specify one foreground color on high-color terminals, and a different
2365 foreground color on low-color terminals.
2366
2367 People are sometimes tempted to create a variable whose value is a
2368 face name. In the vast majority of cases, this is not necessary; the
2369 usual procedure is to define a face with @code{defface}, and then use
2370 its name directly.
2371
2372 @defmac defface face spec doc [keyword value]@dots{}
2373 This macro declares @var{face} as a named face whose default face spec
2374 is given by @var{spec}. You should not quote the symbol @var{face},
2375 and it should not end in @samp{-face} (that would be redundant). The
2376 argument @var{doc} is a documentation string for the face. The
2377 additional @var{keyword} arguments have the same meanings as in
2378 @code{defgroup} and @code{defcustom} (@pxref{Common Keywords}).
2379
2380 If @var{face} already has a default face spec, this macro does
2381 nothing.
2382
2383 The default face spec determines @var{face}'s appearance when no
2384 customizations are in effect (@pxref{Customization}). If @var{face}
2385 has already been customized (via Custom themes or via customizations
2386 read from the init file), its appearance is determined by the custom
2387 face spec(s), which override the default face spec @var{spec}.
2388 However, if the customizations are subsequently removed, the
2389 appearance of @var{face} will again be determined by its default face
2390 spec.
2391
2392 As an exception, if you evaluate a @code{defface} form with
2393 @kbd{C-M-x} in Emacs Lisp mode (@code{eval-defun}), a special feature
2394 of @code{eval-defun} overrides any custom face specs on the face,
2395 causing the face to reflect exactly what the @code{defface} says.
2396
2397 The @var{spec} argument is a @dfn{face spec}, which states how the
2398 face should appear on different kinds of terminals. It should be an
2399 alist whose elements each have the form
2400
2401 @example
2402 (@var{display} . @var{plist})
2403 @end example
2404
2405 @noindent
2406 @var{display} specifies a class of terminals (see below). @var{plist}
2407 is a property list of face attributes and their values, specifying how
2408 the face appears on such terminals. For backward compatibility, you
2409 can also write an element as @code{(@var{display} @var{plist})}.
2410
2411 The @var{display} part of an element of @var{spec} determines which
2412 terminals the element matches. If more than one element of @var{spec}
2413 matches a given terminal, the first element that matches is the one
2414 used for that terminal. There are three possibilities for
2415 @var{display}:
2416
2417 @table @asis
2418 @item @code{default}
2419 This element of @var{spec} doesn't match any terminal; instead, it
2420 specifies defaults that apply to all terminals. This element, if
2421 used, must be the first element of @var{spec}. Each of the following
2422 elements can override any or all of these defaults.
2423
2424 @item @code{t}
2425 This element of @var{spec} matches all terminals. Therefore, any
2426 subsequent elements of @var{spec} are never used. Normally @code{t}
2427 is used in the last (or only) element of @var{spec}.
2428
2429 @item a list
2430 If @var{display} is a list, each element should have the form
2431 @code{(@var{characteristic} @var{value}@dots{})}. Here
2432 @var{characteristic} specifies a way of classifying terminals, and the
2433 @var{value}s are possible classifications which @var{display} should
2434 apply to. Here are the possible values of @var{characteristic}:
2435
2436 @table @code
2437 @item type
2438 The kind of window system the terminal uses---either @code{graphic}
2439 (any graphics-capable display), @code{x}, @code{pc} (for the MS-DOS
2440 console), @code{w32} (for MS Windows 9X/NT/2K/XP), or @code{tty} (a
2441 non-graphics-capable display). @xref{Window Systems, window-system}.
2442
2443 @item class
2444 What kinds of colors the terminal supports---either @code{color},
2445 @code{grayscale}, or @code{mono}.
2446
2447 @item background
2448 The kind of background---either @code{light} or @code{dark}.
2449
2450 @item min-colors
2451 An integer that represents the minimum number of colors the terminal
2452 should support. This matches a terminal if its
2453 @code{display-color-cells} value is at least the specified integer.
2454
2455 @item supports
2456 Whether or not the terminal can display the face attributes given in
2457 @var{value}@dots{} (@pxref{Face Attributes}). @xref{Display Face
2458 Attribute Testing}, for more information on exactly how this testing
2459 is done.
2460 @end table
2461
2462 If an element of @var{display} specifies more than one @var{value} for
2463 a given @var{characteristic}, any of those values is acceptable. If
2464 @var{display} has more than one element, each element should specify a
2465 different @var{characteristic}; then @emph{each} characteristic of the
2466 terminal must match one of the @var{value}s specified for it in
2467 @var{display}.
2468 @end table
2469 @end defmac
2470
2471 For example, here's the definition of the standard face
2472 @code{highlight}:
2473
2474 @example
2475 (defface highlight
2476 '((((class color) (min-colors 88) (background light))
2477 :background "darkseagreen2")
2478 (((class color) (min-colors 88) (background dark))
2479 :background "darkolivegreen")
2480 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background light))
2481 :background "darkseagreen2")
2482 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background dark))
2483 :background "darkolivegreen")
2484 (((class color) (min-colors 8))
2485 :background "green" :foreground "black")
2486 (t :inverse-video t))
2487 "Basic face for highlighting."
2488 :group 'basic-faces)
2489 @end example
2490
2491 Internally, Emacs stores each face's default spec in its
2492 @code{face-defface-spec} symbol property (@pxref{Symbol Properties}).
2493 The @code{saved-face} property stores any face spec saved by the user
2494 using the customization buffer; the @code{customized-face} property
2495 stores the face spec customized for the current session, but not
2496 saved; and the @code{theme-face} property stores an alist associating
2497 the active customization settings and Custom themes with the face
2498 specs for that face. The face's documentation string is stored in the
2499 @code{face-documentation} property.
2500
2501 Normally, a face is declared just once, using @code{defface}, and
2502 any further changes to its appearance are applied using the Customize
2503 framework (e.g., via the Customize user interface or via the
2504 @code{custom-set-faces} function; @pxref{Applying Customizations}), or
2505 by face remapping (@pxref{Face Remapping}). In the rare event that
2506 you need to change a face spec directly from Lisp, you can use the
2507 @code{face-spec-set} function.
2508
2509 @defun face-spec-set face spec &optional spec-type
2510 This function applies @var{spec} as a face spec for @code{face}.
2511 @var{spec} should be a face spec, as described in the above
2512 documentation for @code{defface}.
2513
2514 This function also defines @var{face} as a valid face name if it is
2515 not already one, and (re)calculates its attributes on existing frames.
2516
2517 @cindex override spec @r{(for a face)}
2518 The argument @var{spec-type} determines which spec to set. If it is
2519 @code{nil} or @code{face-override-spec}, this function sets the
2520 @dfn{override spec}, which overrides over all other face specs on
2521 @var{face}. If it is @code{customized-face} or @code{saved-face},
2522 this function sets the customized spec or the saved custom spec. If
2523 it is @code{face-defface-spec}, this function sets the default face
2524 spec (the same one set by @code{defface}). If it is @code{reset},
2525 this function clears out all customization specs and override specs
2526 from @var{face} (in this case, the value of @var{spec} is ignored).
2527 Any other value of @var{spec-type} is reserved for internal use.
2528 @end defun
2529
2530 @node Attribute Functions
2531 @subsection Face Attribute Functions
2532 @cindex face attributes, access and modification
2533
2534 This section describes functions for directly accessing and
2535 modifying the attributes of a named face.
2536
2537 @defun face-attribute face attribute &optional frame inherit
2538 This function returns the value of the @var{attribute} attribute for
2539 @var{face} on @var{frame}.
2540
2541 If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, that means the selected frame
2542 (@pxref{Input Focus}). If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function
2543 returns the value of the specified attribute for newly-created frames
2544 (this is normally @code{unspecified}, unless you have specified some
2545 value using @code{set-face-attribute}; see below).
2546
2547 If @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only attributes directly defined by
2548 @var{face} are considered, so the return value may be
2549 @code{unspecified}, or a relative value. If @var{inherit} is
2550 non-@code{nil}, @var{face}'s definition of @var{attribute} is merged
2551 with the faces specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute; however the
2552 return value may still be @code{unspecified} or relative. If
2553 @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then the result is further
2554 merged with that face (or faces), until it becomes specified and
2555 absolute.
2556
2557 To ensure that the return value is always specified and absolute, use
2558 a value of @code{default} for @var{inherit}; this will resolve any
2559 unspecified or relative values by merging with the @code{default} face
2560 (which is always completely specified).
2561
2562 For example,
2563
2564 @example
2565 (face-attribute 'bold :weight)
2566 @result{} bold
2567 @end example
2568 @end defun
2569
2570 @c FIXME: Add an index for "relative face attribute", maybe here? --xfq
2571 @defun face-attribute-relative-p attribute value
2572 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{value}, when used as the
2573 value of the face attribute @var{attribute}, is relative. This means
2574 it would modify, rather than completely override, any value that comes
2575 from a subsequent face in the face list or that is inherited from
2576 another face.
2577
2578 @code{unspecified} is a relative value for all attributes. For
2579 @code{:height}, floating point and function values are also relative.
2580
2581 For example:
2582
2583 @example
2584 (face-attribute-relative-p :height 2.0)
2585 @result{} t
2586 @end example
2587 @end defun
2588
2589 @defun face-all-attributes face &optional frame
2590 This function returns an alist of attributes of @var{face}. The
2591 elements of the result are name-value pairs of the form
2592 @w{@code{(@var{attr-name} . @var{attr-value})}}. Optional argument
2593 @var{frame} specifies the frame whose definition of @var{face} to
2594 return; if omitted or @code{nil}, the returned value describes the
2595 default attributes of @var{face} for newly created frames.
2596 @end defun
2597
2598 @defun merge-face-attribute attribute value1 value2
2599 If @var{value1} is a relative value for the face attribute
2600 @var{attribute}, returns it merged with the underlying value
2601 @var{value2}; otherwise, if @var{value1} is an absolute value for the
2602 face attribute @var{attribute}, returns @var{value1} unchanged.
2603 @end defun
2604
2605 Normally, Emacs uses the face specs of each face to automatically
2606 calculate its attributes on each frame (@pxref{Defining Faces}). The
2607 function @code{set-face-attribute} can override this calculation by
2608 directly assigning attributes to a face, either on a specific frame or
2609 for all frames. This function is mostly intended for internal usage.
2610
2611 @defun set-face-attribute face frame &rest arguments
2612 This function sets one or more attributes of @var{face} for
2613 @var{frame}. The attributes specifies in this way override the face
2614 spec(s) belonging to @var{face}.
2615
2616 The extra arguments @var{arguments} specify the attributes to set, and
2617 the values for them. They should consist of alternating attribute
2618 names (such as @code{:family} or @code{:underline}) and values. Thus,
2619
2620 @example
2621 (set-face-attribute 'foo nil :weight 'bold :slant 'italic)
2622 @end example
2623
2624 @noindent
2625 sets the attribute @code{:weight} to @code{bold} and the attribute
2626 @code{:slant} to @code{italic}.
2627
2628
2629 If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function sets the default attributes
2630 for newly created frames. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, this function
2631 sets the attributes for all existing frames, as well as for newly
2632 created frames.
2633 @end defun
2634
2635 The following commands and functions mostly provide compatibility
2636 with old versions of Emacs. They work by calling
2637 @code{set-face-attribute}. Values of @code{t} and @code{nil} for
2638 their @var{frame} argument are handled just like
2639 @code{set-face-attribute} and @code{face-attribute}. The commands
2640 read their arguments using the minibuffer, if called interactively.
2641
2642 @deffn Command set-face-foreground face color &optional frame
2643 @deffnx Command set-face-background face color &optional frame
2644 These set the @code{:foreground} attribute (or @code{:background}
2645 attribute, respectively) of @var{face} to @var{color}.
2646 @end deffn
2647
2648 @deffn Command set-face-stipple face pattern &optional frame
2649 This sets the @code{:stipple} attribute of @var{face} to
2650 @var{pattern}.
2651 @end deffn
2652
2653 @deffn Command set-face-font face font &optional frame
2654 This sets the @code{:font} attribute of @var{face} to @var{font}.
2655 @end deffn
2656
2657 @defun set-face-bold face bold-p &optional frame
2658 This sets the @code{:weight} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal}
2659 if @var{bold-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{bold} otherwise.
2660 @end defun
2661
2662 @defun set-face-italic face italic-p &optional frame
2663 This sets the @code{:slant} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal} if
2664 @var{italic-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{italic} otherwise.
2665 @end defun
2666
2667 @defun set-face-underline face underline &optional frame
2668 This sets the @code{:underline} attribute of @var{face} to
2669 @var{underline}.
2670 @end defun
2671
2672 @defun set-face-inverse-video face inverse-video-p &optional frame
2673 This sets the @code{:inverse-video} attribute of @var{face} to
2674 @var{inverse-video-p}.
2675 @end defun
2676
2677 @deffn Command invert-face face &optional frame
2678 This swaps the foreground and background colors of face @var{face}.
2679 @end deffn
2680
2681 The following functions examine the attributes of a face. They
2682 mostly provide compatibility with old versions of Emacs. If you don't
2683 specify @var{frame}, they refer to the selected frame; @code{t} refers
2684 to the default data for new frames. They return @code{unspecified} if
2685 the face doesn't define any value for that attribute. If
2686 @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only an attribute directly defined by the
2687 face is returned. If @var{inherit} is non-@code{nil}, any faces
2688 specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute are considered as well, and
2689 if @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then they are also
2690 considered, until a specified attribute is found. To ensure that the
2691 return value is always specified, use a value of @code{default} for
2692 @var{inherit}.
2693
2694 @defun face-font face &optional frame character
2695 This function returns the name of the font of face @var{face}.
2696
2697 If the optional argument @var{frame} is specified, it returns the name
2698 of the font of @var{face} for that frame. If @var{frame} is omitted or
2699 @code{nil}, the selected frame is used. And, in this case, if the
2700 optional third argument @var{character} is supplied, it returns the font
2701 name used for @var{character}.
2702 @end defun
2703
2704 @defun face-foreground face &optional frame inherit
2705 @defunx face-background face &optional frame inherit
2706 These functions return the foreground color (or background color,
2707 respectively) of face @var{face}, as a string.
2708 @end defun
2709
2710 @defun face-stipple face &optional frame inherit
2711 This function returns the name of the background stipple pattern of face
2712 @var{face}, or @code{nil} if it doesn't have one.
2713 @end defun
2714
2715 @defun face-bold-p face &optional frame inherit
2716 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:weight}
2717 attribute of @var{face} is bolder than normal (i.e., one of
2718 @code{semi-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{extra-bold}, or
2719 @code{ultra-bold}). Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2720 @end defun
2721
2722 @defun face-italic-p face &optional frame inherit
2723 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:slant}
2724 attribute of @var{face} is @code{italic} or @code{oblique}, and
2725 @code{nil} otherwise.
2726 @end defun
2727
2728 @defun face-underline-p face &optional frame inherit
2729 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2730 a non-@code{nil} @code{:underline} attribute.
2731 @end defun
2732
2733 @defun face-inverse-video-p face &optional frame inherit
2734 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2735 a non-@code{nil} @code{:inverse-video} attribute.
2736 @end defun
2737
2738 @node Displaying Faces
2739 @subsection Displaying Faces
2740 @cindex displaying faces
2741 @cindex face merging
2742
2743 When Emacs displays a given piece of text, the visual appearance of
2744 the text may be determined by faces drawn from different sources. If
2745 these various sources together specify more than one face for a
2746 particular character, Emacs merges the attributes of the various
2747 faces. Here is the order in which Emacs merges the faces, from
2748 highest to lowest priority:
2749
2750 @itemize @bullet
2751 @item
2752 If the text consists of a special glyph, the glyph can specify a
2753 particular face. @xref{Glyphs}.
2754
2755 @item
2756 If the text lies within an active region, Emacs highlights it using
2757 the @code{region} face. @xref{Standard Faces,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs
2758 Manual}.
2759
2760 @item
2761 If the text lies within an overlay with a non-@code{nil} @code{face}
2762 property, Emacs applies the face(s) specified by that property. If
2763 the overlay has a @code{mouse-face} property and the mouse is near
2764 enough to the overlay, Emacs applies the face or face attributes
2765 specified by the @code{mouse-face} property instead. @xref{Overlay
2766 Properties}.
2767
2768 When multiple overlays cover one character, an overlay with higher
2769 priority overrides those with lower priority. @xref{Overlays}.
2770
2771 @item
2772 If the text contains a @code{face} or @code{mouse-face} property,
2773 Emacs applies the specified faces and face attributes. @xref{Special
2774 Properties}. (This is how Font Lock mode faces are applied.
2775 @xref{Font Lock Mode}.)
2776
2777 @item
2778 If the text lies within the mode line of the selected window, Emacs
2779 applies the @code{mode-line} face. For the mode line of a
2780 non-selected window, Emacs applies the @code{mode-line-inactive} face.
2781 For a header line, Emacs applies the @code{header-line} face.
2782
2783 @item
2784 If any given attribute has not been specified during the preceding
2785 steps, Emacs applies the attribute of the @code{default} face.
2786 @end itemize
2787
2788 At each stage, if a face has a valid @code{:inherit} attribute,
2789 Emacs treats any attribute with an @code{unspecified} value as having
2790 the corresponding value drawn from the parent face(s). @pxref{Face
2791 Attributes}. Note that the parent face(s) may also leave the
2792 attribute unspecified; in that case, the attribute remains unspecified
2793 at the next level of face merging.
2794
2795 @node Face Remapping
2796 @subsection Face Remapping
2797 @cindex face remapping
2798
2799 The variable @code{face-remapping-alist} is used for buffer-local or
2800 global changes in the appearance of a face. For instance, it is used
2801 to implement the @code{text-scale-adjust} command (@pxref{Text
2802 Scale,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
2803
2804 @defvar face-remapping-alist
2805 The value of this variable is an alist whose elements have the form
2806 @code{(@var{face} . @var{remapping})}. This causes Emacs to display
2807 any text having the face @var{face} with @var{remapping}, rather than
2808 the ordinary definition of @var{face}.
2809
2810 @var{remapping} may be any face spec suitable for a @code{face} text
2811 property: either a face (i.e., a face name or a property list of
2812 attribute/value pairs), or a list of faces. For details, see the
2813 description of the @code{face} text property in @ref{Special
2814 Properties}. @var{remapping} serves as the complete specification for
2815 the remapped face---it replaces the normal definition of @var{face},
2816 instead of modifying it.
2817
2818 If @code{face-remapping-alist} is buffer-local, its local value takes
2819 effect only within that buffer.
2820
2821 Note: face remapping is non-recursive. If @var{remapping} references
2822 the same face name @var{face}, either directly or via the
2823 @code{:inherit} attribute of some other face in @var{remapping}, that
2824 reference uses the normal definition of @var{face}. For instance, if
2825 the @code{mode-line} face is remapped using this entry in
2826 @code{face-remapping-alist}:
2827
2828 @example
2829 (mode-line italic mode-line)
2830 @end example
2831
2832 @noindent
2833 then the new definition of the @code{mode-line} face inherits from the
2834 @code{italic} face, and the @emph{normal} (non-remapped) definition of
2835 @code{mode-line} face.
2836 @end defvar
2837
2838 @cindex relative remapping, faces
2839 @cindex base remapping, faces
2840 The following functions implement a higher-level interface to
2841 @code{face-remapping-alist}. Most Lisp code should use these
2842 functions instead of setting @code{face-remapping-alist} directly, to
2843 avoid trampling on remappings applied elsewhere. These functions are
2844 intended for buffer-local remappings, so they all make
2845 @code{face-remapping-alist} buffer-local as a side-effect. They manage
2846 @code{face-remapping-alist} entries of the form
2847
2848 @example
2849 (@var{face} @var{relative-spec-1} @var{relative-spec-2} @var{...} @var{base-spec})
2850 @end example
2851
2852 @noindent
2853 where, as explained above, each of the @var{relative-spec-N} and
2854 @var{base-spec} is either a face name, or a property list of
2855 attribute/value pairs. Each of the @dfn{relative remapping} entries,
2856 @var{relative-spec-N}, is managed by the
2857 @code{face-remap-add-relative} and @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2858 functions; these are intended for simple modifications like changing
2859 the text size. The @dfn{base remapping} entry, @var{base-spec}, has
2860 the lowest priority and is managed by the @code{face-remap-set-base}
2861 and @code{face-remap-reset-base} functions; it is intended for major
2862 modes to remap faces in the buffers they control.
2863
2864 @defun face-remap-add-relative face &rest specs
2865 This function adds the face spec in @var{specs} as relative
2866 remappings for face @var{face} in the current buffer. The remaining
2867 arguments, @var{specs}, should form either a list of face names, or a
2868 property list of attribute/value pairs.
2869
2870 The return value is a Lisp object that serves as a cookie; you can
2871 pass this object as an argument to @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2872 if you need to remove the remapping later.
2873
2874 @example
2875 ;; Remap the 'escape-glyph' face into a combination
2876 ;; of the 'highlight' and 'italic' faces:
2877 (face-remap-add-relative 'escape-glyph 'highlight 'italic)
2878
2879 ;; Increase the size of the 'default' face by 50%:
2880 (face-remap-add-relative 'default :height 1.5)
2881 @end example
2882 @end defun
2883
2884 @defun face-remap-remove-relative cookie
2885 This function removes a relative remapping previously added by
2886 @code{face-remap-add-relative}. @var{cookie} should be the Lisp
2887 object returned by @code{face-remap-add-relative} when the remapping
2888 was added.
2889 @end defun
2890
2891 @defun face-remap-set-base face &rest specs
2892 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} in the current
2893 buffer to @var{specs}. If @var{specs} is empty, the default base
2894 remapping is restored, similar to calling @code{face-remap-reset-base}
2895 (see below); note that this is different from @var{specs} containing a
2896 single value @code{nil}, which has the opposite result (the global
2897 definition of @var{face} is ignored).
2898
2899 This overwrites the default @var{base-spec}, which inherits the global
2900 face definition, so it is up to the caller to add such inheritance if
2901 so desired.
2902 @end defun
2903
2904 @defun face-remap-reset-base face
2905 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} to its default
2906 value, which inherits from @var{face}'s global definition.
2907 @end defun
2908
2909 @node Face Functions
2910 @subsection Functions for Working with Faces
2911
2912 Here are additional functions for creating and working with faces.
2913
2914 @defun face-list
2915 This function returns a list of all defined face names.
2916 @end defun
2917
2918 @defun face-id face
2919 This function returns the @dfn{face number} of face @var{face}. This
2920 is a number that uniquely identifies a face at low levels within
2921 Emacs. It is seldom necessary to refer to a face by its face number.
2922 @end defun
2923
2924 @defun face-documentation face
2925 This function returns the documentation string of face @var{face}, or
2926 @code{nil} if none was specified for it.
2927 @end defun
2928
2929 @defun face-equal face1 face2 &optional frame
2930 This returns @code{t} if the faces @var{face1} and @var{face2} have the
2931 same attributes for display.
2932 @end defun
2933
2934 @defun face-differs-from-default-p face &optional frame
2935 This returns non-@code{nil} if the face @var{face} displays
2936 differently from the default face.
2937 @end defun
2938
2939 @cindex face alias
2940 @cindex alias, for faces
2941 A @dfn{face alias} provides an equivalent name for a face. You can
2942 define a face alias by giving the alias symbol the @code{face-alias}
2943 property, with a value of the target face name. The following example
2944 makes @code{modeline} an alias for the @code{mode-line} face.
2945
2946 @example
2947 (put 'modeline 'face-alias 'mode-line)
2948 @end example
2949
2950 @defmac define-obsolete-face-alias obsolete-face current-face when
2951 This macro defines @code{obsolete-face} as an alias for
2952 @var{current-face}, and also marks it as obsolete, indicating that it
2953 may be removed in future. @var{when} should be a string indicating
2954 when @code{obsolete-face} was made obsolete (usually a version number
2955 string).
2956 @end defmac
2957
2958 @node Auto Faces
2959 @subsection Automatic Face Assignment
2960 @cindex automatic face assignment
2961 @cindex faces, automatic choice
2962
2963 This hook is used for automatically assigning faces to text in the
2964 buffer. It is part of the implementation of Jit-Lock mode, used by
2965 Font-Lock.
2966
2967 @defvar fontification-functions
2968 This variable holds a list of functions that are called by Emacs
2969 redisplay as needed, just before doing redisplay. They are called even
2970 when Font Lock Mode isn't enabled. When Font Lock Mode is enabled, this
2971 variable usually holds just one function, @code{jit-lock-function}.
2972
2973 The functions are called in the order listed, with one argument, a
2974 buffer position @var{pos}. Collectively they should attempt to assign
2975 faces to the text in the current buffer starting at @var{pos}.
2976
2977 The functions should record the faces they assign by setting the
2978 @code{face} property. They should also add a non-@code{nil}
2979 @code{fontified} property to all the text they have assigned faces to.
2980 That property tells redisplay that faces have been assigned to that text
2981 already.
2982
2983 It is probably a good idea for the functions to do nothing if the
2984 character after @var{pos} already has a non-@code{nil} @code{fontified}
2985 property, but this is not required. If one function overrides the
2986 assignments made by a previous one, the properties after the last
2987 function finishes are the ones that really matter.
2988
2989 For efficiency, we recommend writing these functions so that they
2990 usually assign faces to around 400 to 600 characters at each call.
2991 @end defvar
2992
2993 @node Basic Faces
2994 @subsection Basic Faces
2995 @cindex basic faces
2996
2997 If your Emacs Lisp program needs to assign some faces to text, it is
2998 often a good idea to use certain existing faces or inherit from them,
2999 rather than defining entirely new faces. This way, if other users
3000 have customized the basic faces to give Emacs a certain look, your
3001 program will fit in without additional customization.
3002
3003 Some of the basic faces defined in Emacs are listed below. In
3004 addition to these, you might want to make use of the Font Lock faces
3005 for syntactic highlighting, if highlighting is not already handled by
3006 Font Lock mode, or if some Font Lock faces are not in use.
3007 @xref{Faces for Font Lock}.
3008
3009 @table @code
3010 @item default
3011 The default face, whose attributes are all specified. All other faces
3012 implicitly inherit from it: any unspecified attribute defaults to the
3013 attribute on this face (@pxref{Face Attributes}).
3014
3015 @item bold
3016 @itemx italic
3017 @itemx bold-italic
3018 @itemx underline
3019 @itemx fixed-pitch
3020 @itemx variable-pitch
3021 These have the attributes indicated by their names (e.g., @code{bold}
3022 has a bold @code{:weight} attribute), with all other attributes
3023 unspecified (and so given by @code{default}).
3024
3025 @item shadow
3026 For dimmed-out text. For example, it is used for the ignored
3027 part of a filename in the minibuffer (@pxref{Minibuffer File,,
3028 Minibuffers for File Names, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
3029
3030 @item link
3031 @itemx link-visited
3032 For clickable text buttons that send the user to a different
3033 buffer or location.
3034
3035 @item highlight
3036 For stretches of text that should temporarily stand out. For example,
3037 it is commonly assigned to the @code{mouse-face} property for cursor
3038 highlighting (@pxref{Special Properties}).
3039
3040 @item match
3041 @itemx isearch
3042 @itemx lazy-highlight
3043 For text matching (respectively) permanent search matches, interactive
3044 search matches, and lazy highlighting other matches than the current
3045 interactive one.
3046
3047 @item error
3048 @itemx warning
3049 @itemx success
3050 For text concerning errors, warnings, or successes. For example,
3051 these are used for messages in @file{*Compilation*} buffers.
3052 @end table
3053
3054 @node Font Selection
3055 @subsection Font Selection
3056 @cindex font selection
3057 @cindex selecting a font
3058
3059 Before Emacs can draw a character on a graphical display, it must
3060 select a @dfn{font} for that character@footnote{In this context, the
3061 term @dfn{font} has nothing to do with Font Lock (@pxref{Font Lock
3062 Mode}).}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}. Normally,
3063 Emacs automatically chooses a font based on the faces assigned to that
3064 character---specifically, the face attributes @code{:family},
3065 @code{:weight}, @code{:slant}, and @code{:width} (@pxref{Face
3066 Attributes}). The choice of font also depends on the character to be
3067 displayed; some fonts can only display a limited set of characters.
3068 If no available font exactly fits the requirements, Emacs looks for
3069 the @dfn{closest matching font}. The variables in this section
3070 control how Emacs makes this selection.
3071
3072 @defopt face-font-family-alternatives
3073 If a given family is specified but does not exist, this variable
3074 specifies alternative font families to try. Each element should have
3075 this form:
3076
3077 @example
3078 (@var{family} @var{alternate-families}@dots{})
3079 @end example
3080
3081 If @var{family} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the other
3082 families given in @var{alternate-families}, one by one, until it finds a
3083 family that does exist.
3084 @end defopt
3085
3086 @defopt face-font-selection-order
3087 If there is no font that exactly matches all desired face attributes
3088 (@code{:width}, @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}),
3089 this variable specifies the order in which these attributes should be
3090 considered when selecting the closest matching font. The value should
3091 be a list containing those four attribute symbols, in order of
3092 decreasing importance. The default is @code{(:width :height :weight
3093 :slant)}.
3094
3095 Font selection first finds the best available matches for the first
3096 attribute in the list; then, among the fonts which are best in that
3097 way, it searches for the best matches in the second attribute, and so
3098 on.
3099
3100 The attributes @code{:weight} and @code{:width} have symbolic values in
3101 a range centered around @code{normal}. Matches that are more extreme
3102 (farther from @code{normal}) are somewhat preferred to matches that are
3103 less extreme (closer to @code{normal}); this is designed to ensure that
3104 non-normal faces contrast with normal ones, whenever possible.
3105
3106 One example of a case where this variable makes a difference is when the
3107 default font has no italic equivalent. With the default ordering, the
3108 @code{italic} face will use a non-italic font that is similar to the
3109 default one. But if you put @code{:slant} before @code{:height}, the
3110 @code{italic} face will use an italic font, even if its height is not
3111 quite right.
3112 @end defopt
3113
3114 @defopt face-font-registry-alternatives
3115 This variable lets you specify alternative font registries to try, if a
3116 given registry is specified and doesn't exist. Each element should have
3117 this form:
3118
3119 @example
3120 (@var{registry} @var{alternate-registries}@dots{})
3121 @end example
3122
3123 If @var{registry} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the
3124 other registries given in @var{alternate-registries}, one by one,
3125 until it finds a registry that does exist.
3126 @end defopt
3127
3128 @cindex scalable fonts
3129 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts, but by default it does not use
3130 them.
3131
3132 @defopt scalable-fonts-allowed
3133 This variable controls which scalable fonts to use. A value of
3134 @code{nil}, the default, means do not use scalable fonts. @code{t}
3135 means to use any scalable font that seems appropriate for the text.
3136
3137 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. Then a
3138 scalable font is enabled for use if its name matches any regular
3139 expression in the list. For example,
3140
3141 @example
3142 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("iso10646-1$"))
3143 @end example
3144
3145 @noindent
3146 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry @code{iso10646-1}.
3147 @end defopt
3148
3149 @defvar face-font-rescale-alist
3150 This variable specifies scaling for certain faces. Its value should
3151 be a list of elements of the form
3152
3153 @example
3154 (@var{fontname-regexp} . @var{scale-factor})
3155 @end example
3156
3157 If @var{fontname-regexp} matches the font name that is about to be
3158 used, this says to choose a larger similar font according to the
3159 factor @var{scale-factor}. You would use this feature to normalize
3160 the font size if certain fonts are bigger or smaller than their
3161 nominal heights and widths would suggest.
3162 @end defvar
3163
3164 @node Font Lookup
3165 @subsection Looking Up Fonts
3166 @cindex font lookup
3167 @cindex looking up fonts
3168
3169 @defun x-list-fonts name &optional reference-face frame maximum width
3170 This function returns a list of available font names that match
3171 @var{name}. @var{name} should be a string containing a font name in
3172 either the Fontconfig, GTK, or XLFD format (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
3173 GNU Emacs Manual}). Within an XLFD string, wildcard characters may be
3174 used: the @samp{*} character matches any substring, and the @samp{?}
3175 character matches any single character. Case is ignored when matching
3176 font names.
3177
3178 If the optional arguments @var{reference-face} and @var{frame} are
3179 specified, the returned list includes only fonts that are the same
3180 size as @var{reference-face} (a face name) currently is on the frame
3181 @var{frame}.
3182
3183 The optional argument @var{maximum} sets a limit on how many fonts to
3184 return. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the return value is truncated
3185 after the first @var{maximum} matching fonts. Specifying a small
3186 value for @var{maximum} can make this function much faster, in cases
3187 where many fonts match the pattern.
3188
3189 The optional argument @var{width} specifies a desired font width. If
3190 it is non-@code{nil}, the function only returns those fonts whose
3191 characters are (on average) @var{width} times as wide as
3192 @var{reference-face}.
3193 @end defun
3194
3195 @defun x-family-fonts &optional family frame
3196 This function returns a list describing the available fonts for family
3197 @var{family} on @var{frame}. If @var{family} is omitted or @code{nil},
3198 this list applies to all families, and therefore, it contains all
3199 available fonts. Otherwise, @var{family} must be a string; it may
3200 contain the wildcards @samp{?} and @samp{*}.
3201
3202 The list describes the display that @var{frame} is on; if @var{frame} is
3203 omitted or @code{nil}, it applies to the selected frame's display
3204 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
3205
3206 Each element in the list is a vector of the following form:
3207
3208 @example
3209 [@var{family} @var{width} @var{point-size} @var{weight} @var{slant}
3210 @var{fixed-p} @var{full} @var{registry-and-encoding}]
3211 @end example
3212
3213 The first five elements correspond to face attributes; if you
3214 specify these attributes for a face, it will use this font.
3215
3216 The last three elements give additional information about the font.
3217 @var{fixed-p} is non-@code{nil} if the font is fixed-pitch.
3218 @var{full} is the full name of the font, and
3219 @var{registry-and-encoding} is a string giving the registry and
3220 encoding of the font.
3221 @end defun
3222
3223 @node Fontsets
3224 @subsection Fontsets
3225 @cindex fontset
3226
3227 A @dfn{fontset} is a list of fonts, each assigned to a range of
3228 character codes. An individual font cannot display the whole range of
3229 characters that Emacs supports, but a fontset can. Fontsets have names,
3230 just as fonts do, and you can use a fontset name in place of a font name
3231 when you specify the font for a frame or a face. Here is
3232 information about defining a fontset under Lisp program control.
3233
3234 @defun create-fontset-from-fontset-spec fontset-spec &optional style-variant-p noerror
3235 This function defines a new fontset according to the specification
3236 string @var{fontset-spec}. The string should have this format:
3237
3238 @smallexample
3239 @var{fontpattern}, @r{[}@var{charset}:@var{font}@r{]@dots{}}
3240 @end smallexample
3241
3242 @noindent
3243 Whitespace characters before and after the commas are ignored.
3244
3245 The first part of the string, @var{fontpattern}, should have the form of
3246 a standard X font name, except that the last two fields should be
3247 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}.
3248
3249 The new fontset has two names, one long and one short. The long name is
3250 @var{fontpattern} in its entirety. The short name is
3251 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}. You can refer to the fontset by either
3252 name. If a fontset with the same name already exists, an error is
3253 signaled, unless @var{noerror} is non-@code{nil}, in which case this
3254 function does nothing.
3255
3256 If optional argument @var{style-variant-p} is non-@code{nil}, that says
3257 to create bold, italic and bold-italic variants of the fontset as well.
3258 These variant fontsets do not have a short name, only a long one, which
3259 is made by altering @var{fontpattern} to indicate the bold and/or italic
3260 status.
3261
3262 The specification string also says which fonts to use in the fontset.
3263 See below for the details.
3264 @end defun
3265
3266 The construct @samp{@var{charset}:@var{font}} specifies which font to
3267 use (in this fontset) for one particular character set. Here,
3268 @var{charset} is the name of a character set, and @var{font} is the font
3269 to use for that character set. You can use this construct any number of
3270 times in the specification string.
3271
3272 For the remaining character sets, those that you don't specify
3273 explicitly, Emacs chooses a font based on @var{fontpattern}: it replaces
3274 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} with a value that names one character set.
3275 For the @acronym{ASCII} character set, @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} is replaced
3276 with @samp{ISO8859-1}.
3277
3278 In addition, when several consecutive fields are wildcards, Emacs
3279 collapses them into a single wildcard. This is to prevent use of
3280 auto-scaled fonts. Fonts made by scaling larger fonts are not usable
3281 for editing, and scaling a smaller font is not useful because it is
3282 better to use the smaller font in its own size, which Emacs does.
3283
3284 Thus if @var{fontpattern} is this,
3285
3286 @example
3287 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
3288 @end example
3289
3290 @noindent
3291 the font specification for @acronym{ASCII} characters would be this:
3292
3293 @example
3294 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
3295 @end example
3296
3297 @noindent
3298 and the font specification for Chinese GB2312 characters would be this:
3299
3300 @example
3301 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3302 @end example
3303
3304 You may not have any Chinese font matching the above font
3305 specification. Most X distributions include only Chinese fonts that
3306 have @samp{song ti} or @samp{fangsong ti} in the @var{family} field. In
3307 such a case, @samp{Fontset-@var{n}} can be specified as below:
3308
3309 @smallexample
3310 Emacs.Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24,\
3311 chinese-gb2312:-*-*-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3312 @end smallexample
3313
3314 @noindent
3315 Then, the font specifications for all but Chinese GB2312 characters have
3316 @samp{fixed} in the @var{family} field, and the font specification for
3317 Chinese GB2312 characters has a wild card @samp{*} in the @var{family}
3318 field.
3319
3320 @defun set-fontset-font name character font-spec &optional frame add
3321 This function modifies the existing fontset @var{name} to use the font
3322 matching with @var{font-spec} for the specified @var{character}.
3323
3324 If @var{name} is @code{nil}, this function modifies the fontset of the
3325 selected frame or that of @var{frame} if @var{frame} is not
3326 @code{nil}.
3327
3328 If @var{name} is @code{t}, this function modifies the default
3329 fontset, whose short name is @samp{fontset-default}.
3330
3331 In addition to specifying a single codepoint, @var{character} may be a
3332 cons @code{(@var{from} . @var{to})}, where @var{from} and @var{to} are
3333 character codepoints. In that case, use @var{font-spec} for all the
3334 characters in the range @var{from} and @var{to} (inclusive).
3335
3336 @var{character} may be a charset. In that case, use
3337 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3338
3339 @var{character} may be a script name. In that case, use
3340 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3341
3342 @var{font-spec} may be a font-spec object created by the function
3343 @code{font-spec} (@pxref{Low-Level Font}).
3344
3345 @var{font-spec} may be a cons; @code{(@var{family} . @var{registry})},
3346 where @var{family} is a family name of a font (possibly including a
3347 foundry name at the head), @var{registry} is a registry name of a font
3348 (possibly including an encoding name at the tail).
3349
3350 @var{font-spec} may be a font name string.
3351
3352 @var{font-spec} may be @code{nil}, which explicitly specifies that
3353 there's no font for the specified @var{character}. This is useful,
3354 for example, to avoid expensive system-wide search for fonts for
3355 characters that have no glyphs, like those from the Unicode Private
3356 Use Area (PUA).
3357
3358 The optional argument @var{add}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies how to
3359 add @var{font-spec} to the font specifications previously set. If it
3360 is @code{prepend}, @var{font-spec} is prepended. If it is
3361 @code{append}, @var{font-spec} is appended. By default,
3362 @var{font-spec} overrides the previous settings.
3363
3364 For instance, this changes the default fontset to use a font of which
3365 family name is @samp{Kochi Gothic} for all characters belonging to
3366 the charset @code{japanese-jisx0208}.
3367
3368 @smallexample
3369 (set-fontset-font t 'japanese-jisx0208
3370 (font-spec :family "Kochi Gothic"))
3371 @end smallexample
3372 @end defun
3373
3374 @defun char-displayable-p char
3375 This function returns @code{t} if Emacs ought to be able to display
3376 @var{char}. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has a
3377 font to display the character set that @var{char} belongs to.
3378
3379 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset
3380 does that, this function's value may not be accurate.
3381 @end defun
3382
3383 @node Low-Level Font
3384 @subsection Low-Level Font Representation
3385 @cindex font property
3386
3387 Normally, it is not necessary to manipulate fonts directly. In case
3388 you need to do so, this section explains how.
3389
3390 In Emacs Lisp, fonts are represented using three different Lisp
3391 object types: @dfn{font objects}, @dfn{font specs}, and @dfn{font
3392 entities}.
3393
3394 @defun fontp object &optional type
3395 Return @code{t} if @var{object} is a font object, font spec, or font
3396 entity. Otherwise, return @code{nil}.
3397
3398 The optional argument @var{type}, if non-@code{nil}, determines the
3399 exact type of Lisp object to check for. In that case, @var{type}
3400 should be one of @code{font-object}, @code{font-spec}, or
3401 @code{font-entity}.
3402 @end defun
3403
3404 @cindex font object
3405 A font object is a Lisp object that represents a font that Emacs has
3406 @dfn{opened}. Font objects cannot be modified in Lisp, but they can
3407 be inspected.
3408
3409 @defun font-at position &optional window string
3410 Return the font object that is being used to display the character at
3411 position @var{position} in the window @var{window}. If @var{window}
3412 is @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected window. If @var{string} is
3413 @code{nil}, @var{position} specifies a position in the current buffer;
3414 otherwise, @var{string} should be a string, and @var{position}
3415 specifies a position in that string.
3416 @end defun
3417
3418 @cindex font spec
3419 A font spec is a Lisp object that contains a set of specifications
3420 that can be used to find a font. More than one font may match the
3421 specifications in a font spec.
3422
3423 @defun font-spec &rest arguments
3424 Return a new font spec using the specifications in @var{arguments},
3425 which should come in @code{property}-@code{value} pairs. The possible
3426 specifications are as follows:
3427
3428 @table @code
3429 @item :name
3430 The font name (a string), in either XLFD, Fontconfig, or GTK format.
3431 @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
3432
3433 @item :family
3434 @itemx :foundry
3435 @itemx :weight
3436 @itemx :slant
3437 @itemx :width
3438 These have the same meanings as the face attributes of the same name.
3439 @xref{Face Attributes}.
3440
3441 @item :size
3442 The font size---either a non-negative integer that specifies the pixel
3443 size, or a floating-point number that specifies the point size.
3444
3445 @item :adstyle
3446 Additional typographic style information for the font, such as
3447 @samp{sans}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3448
3449 @cindex font registry
3450 @item :registry
3451 The charset registry and encoding of the font, such as
3452 @samp{iso8859-1}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3453
3454 @item :script
3455 The script that the font must support (a symbol).
3456
3457 @item :lang
3458 The language that the font should support. The value should be a
3459 symbol whose name is a two-letter ISO-639 language name. On X, the
3460 value is matched against the ``Additional Style'' field of the XLFD
3461 name of a font, if it is non-empty. On MS-Windows, fonts matching the
3462 spec are required to support codepages needed for the language.
3463 Currently, only a small set of CJK languages is supported with this
3464 property: @samp{ja}, @samp{ko}, and @samp{zh}.
3465
3466 @item :otf
3467 @cindex OpenType font
3468 The font must be an OpenType font that supports these OpenType
3469 features, provided Emacs is compiled with a library, such as
3470 @samp{libotf} on GNU/Linux, that supports complex text layout for
3471 scripts which need that. The value must be a list of the form
3472
3473 @smallexample
3474 @code{(@var{script-tag} @var{langsys-tag} @var{gsub} @var{gpos})}
3475 @end smallexample
3476
3477 where @var{script-tag} is the OpenType script tag symbol;
3478 @var{langsys-tag} is the OpenType language system tag symbol, or
3479 @code{nil} to use the default language system; @code{gsub} is a list
3480 of OpenType GSUB feature tag symbols, or @code{nil} if none is
3481 required; and @code{gpos} is a list of OpenType GPOS feature tag
3482 symbols, or @code{nil} if none is required. If @code{gsub} or
3483 @code{gpos} is a list, a @code{nil} element in that list means that
3484 the font must not match any of the remaining tag symbols. The
3485 @code{gpos} element may be omitted.
3486 @end table
3487 @end defun
3488
3489 @defun font-put font-spec property value
3490 Set the font property @var{property} in the font-spec @var{font-spec}
3491 to @var{value}.
3492 @end defun
3493
3494 @cindex font entity
3495 A font entity is a reference to a font that need not be open. Its
3496 properties are intermediate between a font object and a font spec:
3497 like a font object, and unlike a font spec, it refers to a single,
3498 specific font. Unlike a font object, creating a font entity does not
3499 load the contents of that font into computer memory. Emacs may open
3500 multiple font objects of different sizes from a single font entity
3501 referring to a scalable font.
3502
3503 @defun find-font font-spec &optional frame
3504 This function returns a font entity that best matches the font spec
3505 @var{font-spec} on frame @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil},
3506 it defaults to the selected frame.
3507 @end defun
3508
3509 @defun list-fonts font-spec &optional frame num prefer
3510 This function returns a list of all font entities that match the font
3511 spec @var{font-spec}.
3512
3513 The optional argument @var{frame}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
3514 frame on which the fonts are to be displayed. The optional argument
3515 @var{num}, if non-@code{nil}, should be an integer that specifies the
3516 maximum length of the returned list. The optional argument
3517 @var{prefer}, if non-@code{nil}, should be another font spec, which is
3518 used to control the order of the returned list; the returned font
3519 entities are sorted in order of decreasing closeness to that font
3520 spec.
3521 @end defun
3522
3523 If you call @code{set-face-attribute} and pass a font spec, font
3524 entity, or font name string as the value of the @code{:font}
3525 attribute, Emacs opens the best matching font that is available
3526 for display. It then stores the corresponding font object as the
3527 actual value of the @code{:font} attribute for that face.
3528
3529 The following functions can be used to obtain information about a
3530 font. For these functions, the @var{font} argument can be a font
3531 object, a font entity, or a font spec.
3532
3533 @defun font-get font property
3534 This function returns the value of the font property @var{property}
3535 for @var{font}.
3536
3537 If @var{font} is a font spec and the font spec does not specify
3538 @var{property}, the return value is @code{nil}. If @var{font} is a
3539 font object or font entity, the value for the @var{:script} property
3540 may be a list of scripts supported by the font.
3541 @end defun
3542
3543 @defun font-face-attributes font &optional frame
3544 This function returns a list of face attributes corresponding to
3545 @var{font}. The optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on
3546 which the font is to be displayed. If it is @code{nil}, the selected
3547 frame is used. The return value has the form
3548
3549 @smallexample
3550 (:family @var{family} :height @var{height} :weight @var{weight}
3551 :slant @var{slant} :width @var{width})
3552 @end smallexample
3553
3554 where the values of @var{family}, @var{height}, @var{weight},
3555 @var{slant}, and @var{width} are face attribute values. Some of these
3556 key-attribute pairs may be omitted from the list if they are not
3557 specified by @var{font}.
3558 @end defun
3559
3560 @defun font-xlfd-name font &optional fold-wildcards
3561 This function returns the XLFD (X Logical Font Descriptor), a string,
3562 matching @var{font}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
3563 information about XLFDs. If the name is too long for an XLFD (which
3564 can contain at most 255 characters), the function returns @code{nil}.
3565
3566 If the optional argument @var{fold-wildcards} is non-@code{nil},
3567 consecutive wildcards in the XLFD are folded into one.
3568 @end defun
3569
3570 The following two functions return important information about a font.
3571
3572 @defun font-info name &optional frame
3573 This function returns information about a font specified by its
3574 @var{name}, a string, as it is used on @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is
3575 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected frame.
3576
3577 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3578 @code{[@var{opened-name} @var{full-name} @var{size} @var{height}
3579 @var{baseline-offset} @var{relative-compose} @var{default-ascent}
3580 @var{max-width} @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width}
3581 @var{average-width} @var{filename} @var{capability}]}. Here's the
3582 description of each components of this vector:
3583
3584 @table @var
3585 @item opened-name
3586 The name used to open the font, a string.
3587
3588 @item full-name
3589 The full name of the font, a string.
3590
3591 @item size
3592 The pixel size of the font.
3593
3594 @item height
3595 The height of the font in pixels.
3596
3597 @item baseline-offset
3598 The offset in pixels from the @acronym{ASCII} baseline, positive
3599 upward.
3600
3601 @item relative-compose
3602 @itemx default-ascent
3603 Numbers controlling how to compose characters.
3604
3605 @item ascent
3606 @itemx descent
3607 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3608 should be equal to the value of @var{height} above.
3609
3610 @item space-width
3611 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3612
3613 @item average-width
3614 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3615 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3616 on display.
3617
3618 @item filename
3619 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3620 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3621
3622 @item capability
3623 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3624 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3625 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3626 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3627 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3628 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3629 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3630 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3631 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3632 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3633 @end table
3634 @end defun
3635
3636 @defun query-font font-object
3637 This function returns information about a @var{font-object}. (This is
3638 in contrast to @code{font-info}, which takes the font name, a string,
3639 as its argument.)
3640
3641 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3642 @code{[@var{name} @var{filename} @var{pixel-size} @var{max-width}
3643 @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width} @var{average-width}
3644 @var{capability}]}. Here's the description of each components of this
3645 vector:
3646
3647 @table @var
3648 @item name
3649 The font name, a string.
3650
3651 @item filename
3652 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3653 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3654
3655 @item pixel-size
3656 The pixel size of the font used to open the font.
3657
3658 @item max-width
3659 The maximum advance width of the font.
3660
3661 @item ascent
3662 @itemx descent
3663 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3664 gives the font height.
3665
3666 @item space-width
3667 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3668
3669 @item average-width
3670 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3671 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3672 on display.
3673
3674 @item capability
3675 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3676 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3677 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3678 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3679 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3680 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3681 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3682 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3683 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3684 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3685 @end table
3686 @end defun
3687
3688 @cindex font information for layout
3689 The following four functions return size information about fonts used
3690 by various faces, allowing various layout considerations in Lisp
3691 programs. These functions take face remapping into consideration,
3692 returning information about the remapped face, if the face in question
3693 was remapped. @xref{Face Remapping}.
3694
3695 @defun default-font-width
3696 This function returns the average width in pixels of the font used by
3697 the current buffer's default face.
3698 @end defun
3699
3700 @defun default-font-height
3701 This function returns the height in pixels of the font used by the
3702 current buffer's default face.
3703 @end defun
3704
3705 @defun window-font-width &optional window face
3706 This function returns the average width in pixels for the font used by
3707 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3708 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3709 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3710 @var{window}.
3711 @end defun
3712
3713 @defun window-font-height &optional window face
3714 This function returns the height in pixels for the font used by
3715 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3716 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3717 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3718 @var{window}.
3719 @end defun
3720
3721 @node Fringes
3722 @section Fringes
3723 @cindex fringes
3724
3725 On graphical displays, Emacs draws @dfn{fringes} next to each
3726 window: thin vertical strips down the sides which can display bitmaps
3727 indicating truncation, continuation, horizontal scrolling, and so on.
3728
3729 @menu
3730 * Fringe Size/Pos:: Specifying where to put the window fringes.
3731 * Fringe Indicators:: Displaying indicator icons in the window fringes.
3732 * Fringe Cursors:: Displaying cursors in the right fringe.
3733 * Fringe Bitmaps:: Specifying bitmaps for fringe indicators.
3734 * Customizing Bitmaps:: Specifying your own bitmaps to use in the fringes.
3735 * Overlay Arrow:: Display of an arrow to indicate position.
3736 @end menu
3737
3738 @node Fringe Size/Pos
3739 @subsection Fringe Size and Position
3740
3741 The following buffer-local variables control the position and width
3742 of fringes in windows showing that buffer.
3743
3744 @defvar fringes-outside-margins
3745 The fringes normally appear between the display margins and the window
3746 text. If the value is non-@code{nil}, they appear outside the display
3747 margins. @xref{Display Margins}.
3748 @end defvar
3749
3750 @defvar left-fringe-width
3751 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the left
3752 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the left fringe
3753 width from the window's frame.
3754 @end defvar
3755
3756 @defvar right-fringe-width
3757 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the right
3758 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the right fringe
3759 width from the window's frame.
3760 @end defvar
3761
3762 Any buffer which does not specify values for these variables uses
3763 the values specified by the @code{left-fringe} and @code{right-fringe}
3764 frame parameters (@pxref{Layout Parameters}).
3765
3766 The above variables actually take effect via the function
3767 @code{set-window-buffer} (@pxref{Buffers and Windows}), which calls
3768 @code{set-window-fringes} as a subroutine. If you change one of these
3769 variables, the fringe display is not updated in existing windows
3770 showing the buffer, unless you call @code{set-window-buffer} again in
3771 each affected window. You can also use @code{set-window-fringes} to
3772 control the fringe display in individual windows.
3773
3774 @defun set-window-fringes window left &optional right outside-margins
3775 This function sets the fringe widths of window @var{window}.
3776 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
3777
3778 The argument @var{left} specifies the width in pixels of the left
3779 fringe, and likewise @var{right} for the right fringe. A value of
3780 @code{nil} for either one stands for the default width. If
3781 @var{outside-margins} is non-@code{nil}, that specifies that fringes
3782 should appear outside of the display margins.
3783 @end defun
3784
3785 @defun window-fringes &optional window
3786 This function returns information about the fringes of a window
3787 @var{window}. If @var{window} is omitted or @code{nil}, the selected
3788 window is used. The value has the form @code{(@var{left-width}
3789 @var{right-width} @var{outside-margins})}.
3790 @end defun
3791
3792
3793 @node Fringe Indicators
3794 @subsection Fringe Indicators
3795 @cindex fringe indicators
3796 @cindex indicators, fringe
3797
3798 @dfn{Fringe indicators} are tiny icons displayed in the window
3799 fringe to indicate truncated or continued lines, buffer boundaries,
3800 etc.
3801
3802 @defopt indicate-empty-lines
3803 @cindex fringes, and empty line indication
3804 @cindex empty lines, indicating
3805 When this is non-@code{nil}, Emacs displays a special glyph in the
3806 fringe of each empty line at the end of the buffer, on graphical
3807 displays. @xref{Fringes}. This variable is automatically
3808 buffer-local in every buffer.
3809 @end defopt
3810
3811 @defopt indicate-buffer-boundaries
3812 @cindex buffer boundaries, indicating
3813 This buffer-local variable controls how the buffer boundaries and
3814 window scrolling are indicated in the window fringes.
3815
3816 Emacs can indicate the buffer boundaries---that is, the first and last
3817 line in the buffer---with angle icons when they appear on the screen.
3818 In addition, Emacs can display an up-arrow in the fringe to show
3819 that there is text above the screen, and a down-arrow to show
3820 there is text below the screen.
3821
3822 There are three kinds of basic values:
3823
3824 @table @asis
3825 @item @code{nil}
3826 Don't display any of these fringe icons.
3827 @item @code{left}
3828 Display the angle icons and arrows in the left fringe.
3829 @item @code{right}
3830 Display the angle icons and arrows in the right fringe.
3831 @item any non-alist
3832 Display the angle icons in the left fringe
3833 and don't display the arrows.
3834 @end table
3835
3836 Otherwise the value should be an alist that specifies which fringe
3837 indicators to display and where. Each element of the alist should
3838 have the form @code{(@var{indicator} . @var{position})}. Here,
3839 @var{indicator} is one of @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{up},
3840 @code{down}, and @code{t} (which covers all the icons not yet
3841 specified), while @var{position} is one of @code{left}, @code{right}
3842 and @code{nil}.
3843
3844 For example, @code{((top . left) (t . right))} places the top angle
3845 bitmap in left fringe, and the bottom angle bitmap as well as both
3846 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show the angle bitmaps in the left
3847 fringe, and no arrow bitmaps, use @code{((top . left) (bottom . left))}.
3848 @end defopt
3849
3850 @defvar fringe-indicator-alist
3851 This buffer-local variable specifies the mapping from logical fringe
3852 indicators to the actual bitmaps displayed in the window fringes. The
3853 value is an alist of elements @code{(@var{indicator}
3854 . @var{bitmaps})}, where @var{indicator} specifies a logical indicator
3855 type and @var{bitmaps} specifies the fringe bitmaps to use for that
3856 indicator.
3857
3858 Each @var{indicator} should be one of the following symbols:
3859
3860 @table @asis
3861 @item @code{truncation}, @code{continuation}.
3862 Used for truncation and continuation lines.
3863
3864 @item @code{up}, @code{down}, @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{top-bottom}
3865 Used when @code{indicate-buffer-boundaries} is non-@code{nil}:
3866 @code{up} and @code{down} indicate a buffer boundary lying above or
3867 below the window edge; @code{top} and @code{bottom} indicate the
3868 topmost and bottommost buffer text line; and @code{top-bottom}
3869 indicates where there is just one line of text in the buffer.
3870
3871 @item @code{empty-line}
3872 Used to indicate empty lines when @code{indicate-empty-lines} is
3873 non-@code{nil}.
3874
3875 @item @code{overlay-arrow}
3876 Used for overlay arrows (@pxref{Overlay Arrow}).
3877 @c Is this used anywhere?
3878 @c @item Unknown bitmap indicator:
3879 @c @code{unknown}.
3880 @end table
3881
3882 Each @var{bitmaps} value may be a list of symbols @code{(@var{left}
3883 @var{right} [@var{left1} @var{right1}])}. The @var{left} and
3884 @var{right} symbols specify the bitmaps shown in the left and/or right
3885 fringe, for the specific indicator. @var{left1} and @var{right1} are
3886 specific to the @code{bottom} and @code{top-bottom} indicators, and
3887 are used to indicate that the last text line has no final newline.
3888 Alternatively, @var{bitmaps} may be a single symbol which is used in
3889 both left and right fringes.
3890
3891 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for a list of standard bitmap symbols and how
3892 to define your own. In addition, @code{nil} represents the empty
3893 bitmap (i.e., an indicator that is not shown).
3894
3895 When @code{fringe-indicator-alist} has a buffer-local value, and
3896 there is no bitmap defined for a logical indicator, or the bitmap is
3897 @code{t}, the corresponding value from the default value of
3898 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} is used.
3899 @end defvar
3900
3901 @node Fringe Cursors
3902 @subsection Fringe Cursors
3903 @cindex fringe cursors
3904 @cindex cursor, fringe
3905
3906 When a line is exactly as wide as the window, Emacs displays the
3907 cursor in the right fringe instead of using two lines. Different
3908 bitmaps are used to represent the cursor in the fringe depending on
3909 the current buffer's cursor type.
3910
3911 @defopt overflow-newline-into-fringe
3912 If this is non-@code{nil}, lines exactly as wide as the window (not
3913 counting the final newline character) are not continued. Instead,
3914 when point is at the end of the line, the cursor appears in the right
3915 fringe.
3916 @end defopt
3917
3918 @defvar fringe-cursor-alist
3919 This variable specifies the mapping from logical cursor type to the
3920 actual fringe bitmaps displayed in the right fringe. The value is an
3921 alist where each element has the form @code{(@var{cursor-type}
3922 . @var{bitmap})}, which means to use the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to
3923 display cursors of type @var{cursor-type}.
3924
3925 Each @var{cursor-type} should be one of @code{box}, @code{hollow},
3926 @code{bar}, @code{hbar}, or @code{hollow-small}. The first four have
3927 the same meanings as in the @code{cursor-type} frame parameter
3928 (@pxref{Cursor Parameters}). The @code{hollow-small} type is used
3929 instead of @code{hollow} when the normal @code{hollow-rectangle}
3930 bitmap is too tall to fit on a specific display line.
3931
3932 Each @var{bitmap} should be a symbol specifying the fringe bitmap to
3933 be displayed for that logical cursor type.
3934 @iftex
3935 See the next subsection for details.
3936 @end iftex
3937 @ifnottex
3938 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}.
3939 @end ifnottex
3940
3941 @c FIXME: I can't find the fringes-indicator-alist variable. Maybe
3942 @c it should be fringe-indicator-alist or fringe-cursor-alist? --xfq
3943 When @code{fringe-cursor-alist} has a buffer-local value, and there is
3944 no bitmap defined for a cursor type, the corresponding value from the
3945 default value of @code{fringes-indicator-alist} is used.
3946 @end defvar
3947
3948 @node Fringe Bitmaps
3949 @subsection Fringe Bitmaps
3950 @cindex fringe bitmaps
3951 @cindex bitmaps, fringe
3952
3953 The @dfn{fringe bitmaps} are the actual bitmaps which represent the
3954 logical fringe indicators for truncated or continued lines, buffer
3955 boundaries, overlay arrows, etc. Each bitmap is represented by a
3956 symbol.
3957 @iftex
3958 These symbols are referred to by the variables
3959 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist},
3960 described in the previous subsections.
3961 @end iftex
3962 @ifnottex
3963 These symbols are referred to by the variable
3964 @code{fringe-indicator-alist}, which maps fringe indicators to bitmaps
3965 (@pxref{Fringe Indicators}), and the variable
3966 @code{fringe-cursor-alist}, which maps fringe cursors to bitmaps
3967 (@pxref{Fringe Cursors}).
3968 @end ifnottex
3969
3970 Lisp programs can also directly display a bitmap in the left or
3971 right fringe, by using a @code{display} property for one of the
3972 characters appearing in the line (@pxref{Other Display Specs}). Such
3973 a display specification has the form
3974
3975 @example
3976 (@var{fringe} @var{bitmap} [@var{face}])
3977 @end example
3978
3979 @noindent
3980 @var{fringe} is either the symbol @code{left-fringe} or
3981 @code{right-fringe}. @var{bitmap} is a symbol identifying the bitmap
3982 to display. The optional @var{face} names a face whose foreground
3983 color is used to display the bitmap; this face is automatically merged
3984 with the @code{fringe} face.
3985
3986 Here is a list of the standard fringe bitmaps defined in Emacs, and
3987 how they are currently used in Emacs (via
3988 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist}):
3989
3990 @table @asis
3991 @item @code{left-arrow}, @code{right-arrow}
3992 Used to indicate truncated lines.
3993
3994 @item @code{left-curly-arrow}, @code{right-curly-arrow}
3995 Used to indicate continued lines.
3996
3997 @item @code{right-triangle}, @code{left-triangle}
3998 The former is used by overlay arrows. The latter is unused.
3999
4000 @item @code{up-arrow}, @code{down-arrow}, @code{top-left-angle} @code{top-right-angle}
4001 @itemx @code{bottom-left-angle}, @code{bottom-right-angle}
4002 @itemx @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
4003 @itemx @code{left-bracket}, @code{right-bracket}, @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
4004 Used to indicate buffer boundaries.
4005
4006 @item @code{filled-rectangle}, @code{hollow-rectangle}
4007 @itemx @code{filled-square}, @code{hollow-square}
4008 @itemx @code{vertical-bar}, @code{horizontal-bar}
4009 Used for different types of fringe cursors.
4010
4011 @item @code{empty-line}, @code{exclamation-mark}, @code{question-mark}, @code{exclamation-mark}
4012 Not used by core Emacs features.
4013 @end table
4014
4015 @noindent
4016 The next subsection describes how to define your own fringe bitmaps.
4017
4018 @defun fringe-bitmaps-at-pos &optional pos window
4019 This function returns the fringe bitmaps of the display line
4020 containing position @var{pos} in window @var{window}. The return
4021 value has the form @code{(@var{left} @var{right} @var{ov})}, where @var{left}
4022 is the symbol for the fringe bitmap in the left fringe (or @code{nil}
4023 if no bitmap), @var{right} is similar for the right fringe, and @var{ov}
4024 is non-@code{nil} if there is an overlay arrow in the left fringe.
4025
4026 The value is @code{nil} if @var{pos} is not visible in @var{window}.
4027 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, that stands for the selected window.
4028 If @var{pos} is @code{nil}, that stands for the value of point in
4029 @var{window}.
4030 @end defun
4031
4032 @node Customizing Bitmaps
4033 @subsection Customizing Fringe Bitmaps
4034 @cindex fringe bitmaps, customizing
4035
4036 @defun define-fringe-bitmap bitmap bits &optional height width align
4037 This function defines the symbol @var{bitmap} as a new fringe bitmap,
4038 or replaces an existing bitmap with that name.
4039
4040 The argument @var{bits} specifies the image to use. It should be
4041 either a string or a vector of integers, where each element (an
4042 integer) corresponds to one row of the bitmap. Each bit of an integer
4043 corresponds to one pixel of the bitmap, where the low bit corresponds
4044 to the rightmost pixel of the bitmap.
4045
4046 The height is normally the length of @var{bits}. However, you
4047 can specify a different height with non-@code{nil} @var{height}. The width
4048 is normally 8, but you can specify a different width with non-@code{nil}
4049 @var{width}. The width must be an integer between 1 and 16.
4050
4051 The argument @var{align} specifies the positioning of the bitmap
4052 relative to the range of rows where it is used; the default is to
4053 center the bitmap. The allowed values are @code{top}, @code{center},
4054 or @code{bottom}.
4055
4056 The @var{align} argument may also be a list @code{(@var{align}
4057 @var{periodic})} where @var{align} is interpreted as described above.
4058 If @var{periodic} is non-@code{nil}, it specifies that the rows in
4059 @code{bits} should be repeated enough times to reach the specified
4060 height.
4061 @end defun
4062
4063 @defun destroy-fringe-bitmap bitmap
4064 This function destroy the fringe bitmap identified by @var{bitmap}.
4065 If @var{bitmap} identifies a standard fringe bitmap, it actually
4066 restores the standard definition of that bitmap, instead of
4067 eliminating it entirely.
4068 @end defun
4069
4070 @defun set-fringe-bitmap-face bitmap &optional face
4071 This sets the face for the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to @var{face}.
4072 If @var{face} is @code{nil}, it selects the @code{fringe} face. The
4073 bitmap's face controls the color to draw it in.
4074
4075 @var{face} is merged with the @code{fringe} face, so normally
4076 @var{face} should specify only the foreground color.
4077 @end defun
4078
4079 @node Overlay Arrow
4080 @subsection The Overlay Arrow
4081 @c @cindex overlay arrow Duplicates variable names
4082
4083 The @dfn{overlay arrow} is useful for directing the user's attention
4084 to a particular line in a buffer. For example, in the modes used for
4085 interface to debuggers, the overlay arrow indicates the line of code
4086 about to be executed. This feature has nothing to do with
4087 @dfn{overlays} (@pxref{Overlays}).
4088
4089 @defvar overlay-arrow-string
4090 This variable holds the string to display to call attention to a
4091 particular line, or @code{nil} if the arrow feature is not in use.
4092 On a graphical display the contents of the string are ignored; instead a
4093 glyph is displayed in the fringe area to the left of the display area.
4094 @end defvar
4095
4096 @defvar overlay-arrow-position
4097 This variable holds a marker that indicates where to display the overlay
4098 arrow. It should point at the beginning of a line. On a non-graphical
4099 display the arrow text
4100 appears at the beginning of that line, overlaying any text that would
4101 otherwise appear. Since the arrow is usually short, and the line
4102 usually begins with indentation, normally nothing significant is
4103 overwritten.
4104
4105 The overlay-arrow string is displayed in any given buffer if the value
4106 of @code{overlay-arrow-position} in that buffer points into that
4107 buffer. Thus, it is possible to display multiple overlay arrow strings
4108 by creating buffer-local bindings of @code{overlay-arrow-position}.
4109 However, it is usually cleaner to use
4110 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list} to achieve this result.
4111 @c !!! overlay-arrow-position: but the overlay string may remain in the display
4112 @c of some other buffer until an update is required. This should be fixed
4113 @c now. Is it?
4114 @end defvar
4115
4116 You can do a similar job by creating an overlay with a
4117 @code{before-string} property. @xref{Overlay Properties}.
4118
4119 You can define multiple overlay arrows via the variable
4120 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list}.
4121
4122 @defvar overlay-arrow-variable-list
4123 This variable's value is a list of variables, each of which specifies
4124 the position of an overlay arrow. The variable
4125 @code{overlay-arrow-position} has its normal meaning because it is on
4126 this list.
4127 @end defvar
4128
4129 Each variable on this list can have properties
4130 @code{overlay-arrow-string} and @code{overlay-arrow-bitmap} that
4131 specify an overlay arrow string (for text terminals) or fringe bitmap
4132 (for graphical terminals) to display at the corresponding overlay
4133 arrow position. If either property is not set, the default
4134 @code{overlay-arrow-string} or @code{overlay-arrow} fringe indicator
4135 is used.
4136
4137
4138 @node Scroll Bars
4139 @section Scroll Bars
4140 @cindex scroll bars
4141
4142 Normally the frame parameter @code{vertical-scroll-bars} controls
4143 whether the windows in the frame have vertical scroll bars, and whether
4144 they are on the left or right. The frame parameter
4145 @code{scroll-bar-width} specifies how wide they are (@code{nil} meaning
4146 the default).
4147
4148 The frame parameter @code{horizontal-scroll-bars} controls whether
4149 the windows in the frame have horizontal scroll bars. The frame
4150 parameter @code{scroll-bar-height} specifies how high they are
4151 (@code{nil} meaning the default). @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4152
4153 @vindex horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p
4154 Horizontal scroll bars are not available on all platforms. The
4155 function @code{horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p} which takes no
4156 argument returns non-@code{nil} if they are available on your system.
4157
4158 The following three functions take as argument a live frame which
4159 defaults to the selected one.
4160
4161 @defun frame-current-scroll-bars &optional frame
4162 This function reports the scroll bar types for frame @var{frame}. The
4163 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4164 @var{horizontal-type})}, where @var{vertical-type} is either
4165 @code{left}, @code{right}, or @code{nil} (which means no vertical scroll
4166 bar.) @var{horizontal-type} is either @code{bottom} or @code{nil}
4167 (which means no horizontal scroll bar).
4168 @end defun
4169
4170 @defun frame-scroll-bar-width &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4171 This function returns the width of vertical scroll bars of @var{frame}
4172 in pixels.
4173 @end defun
4174
4175 @defun frame-scroll-bar-height &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4176 This function returns the height of horizontal scroll bars of
4177 @var{frame} in pixels.
4178 @end defun
4179
4180 You can override the frame specific settings for individual windows by
4181 using the following function:
4182
4183 @defun set-window-scroll-bars window &optional width vertical-type height horizontal-type
4184 This function sets the width and/or height and the types of scroll bars
4185 for window @var{window}.
4186
4187 @var{width} specifies the width of the vertical scroll bar in pixels
4188 (@code{nil} means use the width specified for the frame).
4189 @var{vertical-type} specifies whether to have a vertical scroll bar and,
4190 if so, where. The possible values are @code{left}, @code{right},
4191 @code{t}, which means to use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no
4192 vertical scroll bar.
4193
4194 @var{height} specifies the height of the horizontal scroll bar in pixels
4195 (@code{nil} means use the height specified for the frame).
4196 @var{horizontal-type} specifies whether to have a horizontal scroll bar.
4197 The possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4198 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no horizontal scroll bar.
4199
4200 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
4201 @end defun
4202
4203 The following four functions take as argument a live window which
4204 defaults to the selected one.
4205
4206 @defun window-scroll-bars &optional window
4207 This function returns a list of the form @code{(@var{width}
4208 @var{columns} @var{vertical-type} @var{height} @var{lines}
4209 @var{horizontal-type})}.
4210
4211 The value @var{width} is the value that was specified for the width of
4212 the vertical scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{columns} is the
4213 (possibly rounded) number of columns that the vertical scroll bar
4214 actually occupies.
4215
4216 The value @var{height} is the value that was specified for the height of
4217 the horizontal scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{lines} is the
4218 (possibly rounded) number of lines that the horizontally scroll bar
4219 actually occupies.
4220 @end defun
4221
4222 @defun window-current-scroll-bars &optional window
4223 This function reports the scroll bar type for window @var{window}. The
4224 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4225 @var{horizontal-type})}. Unlike @code{window-scroll-bars}, this reports
4226 the scroll bar type actually used, once frame defaults and
4227 @code{scroll-bar-mode} are taken into account.
4228 @end defun
4229
4230 @defun window-scroll-bar-width &optional window
4231 This function returns the width in pixels of @var{window}'s vertical
4232 scrollbar.
4233 @end defun
4234
4235 @defun window-scroll-bar-height &optional window
4236 This function returns the height in pixels of @var{window}'s horizontal
4237 scrollbar.
4238 @end defun
4239
4240 If you don't specify these values for a window with
4241 @code{set-window-scroll-bars}, the buffer-local variables
4242 @code{vertical-scroll-bar}, @code{horizontal-scroll-bar},
4243 @code{scroll-bar-width} and @code{scroll-bar-height} in the buffer being
4244 displayed control the window's scroll bars. The function
4245 @code{set-window-buffer} examines these variables. If you change them
4246 in a buffer that is already visible in a window, you can make the window
4247 take note of the new values by calling @code{set-window-buffer}
4248 specifying the same buffer that is already displayed.
4249
4250 You can control the appearance of scroll bars for a particular buffer by
4251 setting the following variables which automatically become buffer-local
4252 when set.
4253
4254 @defvar vertical-scroll-bar
4255 This variable specifies the location of the vertical scroll bar. The
4256 possible values are @code{left}, @code{right}, @code{t}, which means to
4257 use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4258 @end defvar
4259
4260 @defvar horizontal-scroll-bar
4261 This variable specifies the location of the horizontal scroll bar. The
4262 possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4263 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4264 @end defvar
4265
4266 @defvar scroll-bar-width
4267 This variable specifies the width of the buffer's vertical scroll bars,
4268 measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4269 specified by the frame.
4270 @end defvar
4271
4272 @defvar scroll-bar-height
4273 This variable specifies the height of the buffer's horizontal scroll
4274 bar, measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4275 specified by the frame.
4276 @end defvar
4277
4278 Finally you can toggle the display of scroll bars on all frames by
4279 customizing the variables @code{scroll-bar-mode} and
4280 @code{horizontal-scroll-bar-mode}.
4281
4282 @defopt scroll-bar-mode
4283 This variable controls whether and where to put vertical scroll bars in
4284 all frames. The possible values are @code{nil} for no scroll bars,
4285 @code{left} to put scroll bars on the left and @code{right} to put
4286 scroll bars on the right.
4287 @end defopt
4288
4289 @defopt horizontal-scroll-bar-mode
4290 This variable controls whether to display horizontal scroll bars on all
4291 frames.
4292 @end defopt
4293
4294
4295 @node Window Dividers
4296 @section Window Dividers
4297 @cindex window dividers
4298 @cindex right dividers
4299 @cindex bottom dividers
4300
4301 Window dividers are bars drawn between a frame's windows. A right
4302 divider is drawn between a window and any adjacent windows on the right.
4303 Its width (thickness) is specified by the frame parameter
4304 @code{right-divider-width}. A bottom divider is drawn between a
4305 window and adjacent windows on the bottom or the echo area. Its width
4306 is specified by the frame parameter @code{bottom-divider-width}. In
4307 either case, specifying a width of zero means to not draw such dividers.
4308 @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4309
4310 Technically, a right divider belongs to the window on its left,
4311 which means that its width contributes to the total width of that
4312 window. A bottom divider belongs to the window above it, which
4313 means that its width contributes to the total height of that window.
4314 @xref{Window Sizes}. When a window has both, a right and a bottom
4315 divider, the bottom divider prevails. This means that a bottom
4316 divider is drawn over the full total width of its window while the right
4317 divider ends above the bottom divider.
4318
4319 Dividers can be dragged with the mouse and are therefore useful for
4320 adjusting the sizes of adjacent windows with the mouse. They also serve
4321 to visually set apart adjacent windows when no scroll bars or mode lines
4322 are present. The following three faces allow the customization of the
4323 appearance of dividers:
4324
4325 @table @code
4326 @item window-divider
4327 When a divider is less than three pixels wide, it is drawn solidly with
4328 the foreground of this face. For larger dividers this face is used for
4329 the inner part only, excluding the first and last pixel.
4330
4331 @item window-divider-first-pixel
4332 This is the face used for drawing the first pixel of a divider that is
4333 at least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to
4334 the same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4335
4336 @item window-divider-last-pixel
4337 This is the face used for drawing the last pixel of a divider that is at
4338 least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to the
4339 same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4340 @end table
4341
4342 You can get the sizes of the dividers of a specific window with the
4343 following two functions.
4344
4345 @defun window-right-divider-width &optional window
4346 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s right divider.
4347 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4348 The return value is always zero for a rightmost window.
4349 @end defun
4350
4351 @defun window-bottom-divider-width &optional window
4352 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s bottom divider.
4353 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4354 The return value is zero for the minibuffer window or a bottommost
4355 window on a minibuffer-less frame.
4356 @end defun
4357
4358
4359 @node Display Property
4360 @section The @code{display} Property
4361 @cindex display specification
4362 @kindex display @r{(text property)}
4363
4364 The @code{display} text property (or overlay property) is used to
4365 insert images into text, and to control other aspects of how text
4366 displays. The value of the @code{display} property should be a
4367 display specification, or a list or vector containing several display
4368 specifications. Display specifications in the same @code{display}
4369 property value generally apply in parallel to the text they cover.
4370
4371 If several sources (overlays and/or a text property) specify values
4372 for the @code{display} property, only one of the values takes effect,
4373 following the rules of @code{get-char-property}. @xref{Examining
4374 Properties}.
4375
4376 The rest of this section describes several kinds of
4377 display specifications and what they mean.
4378
4379 @menu
4380 * Replacing Specs:: Display specs that replace the text.
4381 * Specified Space:: Displaying one space with a specified width.
4382 * Pixel Specification:: Specifying space width or height in pixels.
4383 * Other Display Specs:: Displaying an image; adjusting the height,
4384 spacing, and other properties of text.
4385 * Display Margins:: Displaying text or images to the side of the main text.
4386 @end menu
4387
4388 @node Replacing Specs
4389 @subsection Display Specs That Replace The Text
4390 @cindex replacing display specs
4391
4392 Some kinds of display specifications specify something to display
4393 instead of the text that has the property. These are called
4394 @dfn{replacing} display specifications. Emacs does not allow the user
4395 to interactively move point into the middle of buffer text that is
4396 replaced in this way.
4397
4398 If a list of display specifications includes more than one replacing
4399 display specification, the first overrides the rest. Replacing
4400 display specifications make most other display specifications
4401 irrelevant, since those don't apply to the replacement.
4402
4403 For replacing display specifications, @dfn{the text that has the
4404 property} means all the consecutive characters that have the same
4405 Lisp object as their @code{display} property; these characters are
4406 replaced as a single unit. If two characters have different Lisp
4407 objects as their @code{display} properties (i.e., objects which are
4408 not @code{eq}), they are handled separately.
4409
4410 Here is an example which illustrates this point. A string serves as
4411 a replacing display specification, which replaces the text that has
4412 the property with the specified string (@pxref{Other Display Specs}).
4413 Consider the following function:
4414
4415 @smallexample
4416 (defun foo ()
4417 (dotimes (i 5)
4418 (let ((string (concat "A"))
4419 (start (+ i i (point-min))))
4420 (put-text-property start (1+ start) 'display string)
4421 (put-text-property start (+ 2 start) 'display string))))
4422 @end smallexample
4423
4424 @noindent
4425 This function gives each of the first ten characters in the buffer a
4426 @code{display} property which is a string @code{"A"}, but they don't
4427 all get the same string object. The first two characters get the same
4428 string object, so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; the fact that
4429 the display property was assigned in two separate calls to
4430 @code{put-text-property} is irrelevant. Similarly, the next two
4431 characters get a second string (@code{concat} creates a new string
4432 object), so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; and so on. Thus, the
4433 ten characters appear as five A's.
4434
4435 @node Specified Space
4436 @subsection Specified Spaces
4437 @cindex spaces, specified height or width
4438 @cindex variable-width spaces
4439
4440 To display a space of specified width and/or height, use a display
4441 specification of the form @code{(space . @var{props})}, where
4442 @var{props} is a property list (a list of alternating properties and
4443 values). You can put this property on one or more consecutive
4444 characters; a space of the specified height and width is displayed in
4445 place of @emph{all} of those characters. These are the properties you
4446 can use in @var{props} to specify the weight of the space:
4447
4448 @table @code
4449 @item :width @var{width}
4450 If @var{width} is a number, it specifies
4451 that the space width should be @var{width} times the normal character
4452 width. @var{width} can also be a @dfn{pixel width} specification
4453 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4454
4455 @item :relative-width @var{factor}
4456 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4457 first character in the group of consecutive characters that have the
4458 same @code{display} property. The space width is the pixel width of
4459 that character, multiplied by @var{factor}. (On text-mode terminals,
4460 the ``pixel width'' of a character is usually 1, but it could be more
4461 for TABs and double-width CJK characters.)
4462
4463 @item :align-to @var{hpos}
4464 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach @var{hpos}.
4465 If @var{hpos} is a number, it is measured in units of the normal
4466 character width. @var{hpos} can also be a @dfn{pixel width}
4467 specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4468 @end table
4469
4470 You should use one and only one of the above properties. You can
4471 also specify the height of the space, with these properties:
4472
4473 @table @code
4474 @item :height @var{height}
4475 Specifies the height of the space.
4476 If @var{height} is a number, it specifies
4477 that the space height should be @var{height} times the normal character
4478 height. The @var{height} may also be a @dfn{pixel height} specification
4479 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4480
4481 @item :relative-height @var{factor}
4482 Specifies the height of the space, multiplying the ordinary height
4483 of the text having this display specification by @var{factor}.
4484
4485 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4486 If the value of @var{ascent} is a non-negative number no greater than
4487 100, it specifies that @var{ascent} percent of the height of the space
4488 should be considered as the ascent of the space---that is, the part
4489 above the baseline. The ascent may also be specified in pixel units
4490 with a @dfn{pixel ascent} specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4491
4492 @end table
4493
4494 Don't use both @code{:height} and @code{:relative-height} together.
4495
4496 The @code{:width} and @code{:align-to} properties are supported on
4497 non-graphic terminals, but the other space properties in this section
4498 are not.
4499
4500 Note that space properties are treated as paragraph separators for
4501 the purposes of reordering bidirectional text for display.
4502 @xref{Bidirectional Display}, for the details.
4503
4504 @node Pixel Specification
4505 @subsection Pixel Specification for Spaces
4506 @cindex spaces, pixel specification
4507
4508 The value of the @code{:width}, @code{:align-to}, @code{:height},
4509 and @code{:ascent} properties can be a special kind of expression that
4510 is evaluated during redisplay. The result of the evaluation is used
4511 as an absolute number of pixels.
4512
4513 The following expressions are supported:
4514
4515 @smallexample
4516 @group
4517 @var{expr} ::= @var{num} | (@var{num}) | @var{unit} | @var{elem} | @var{pos} | @var{image} | @var{form}
4518 @var{num} ::= @var{integer} | @var{float} | @var{symbol}
4519 @var{unit} ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
4520 @end group
4521 @group
4522 @var{elem} ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin
4523 | scroll-bar | text
4524 @var{pos} ::= left | center | right
4525 @var{form} ::= (@var{num} . @var{expr}) | (@var{op} @var{expr} ...)
4526 @var{op} ::= + | -
4527 @end group
4528 @end smallexample
4529
4530 The form @var{num} specifies a fraction of the default frame font
4531 height or width. The form @code{(@var{num})} specifies an absolute
4532 number of pixels. If @var{num} is a symbol, @var{symbol}, its
4533 buffer-local variable binding is used.
4534
4535 The @code{in}, @code{mm}, and @code{cm} units specify the number of
4536 pixels per inch, millimeter, and centimeter, respectively. The
4537 @code{width} and @code{height} units correspond to the default width
4538 and height of the current face. An image specification @code{image}
4539 corresponds to the width or height of the image.
4540
4541 The elements @code{left-fringe}, @code{right-fringe},
4542 @code{left-margin}, @code{right-margin}, @code{scroll-bar}, and
4543 @code{text} specify to the width of the corresponding area of the
4544 window.
4545
4546 The @code{left}, @code{center}, and @code{right} positions can be
4547 used with @code{:align-to} to specify a position relative to the left
4548 edge, center, or right edge of the text area.
4549
4550 Any of the above window elements (except @code{text}) can also be
4551 used with @code{:align-to} to specify that the position is relative to
4552 the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for a relative
4553 position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of these
4554 symbols), further occurrences of these symbols are interpreted as the
4555 width of the specified area. For example, to align to the center of
4556 the left-margin, use
4557
4558 @example
4559 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
4560 @end example
4561
4562 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative
4563 to the left edge of the text area. For example, @samp{:align-to 0} in a
4564 header-line aligns with the first text column in the text area.
4565
4566 A value of the form @code{(@var{num} . @var{expr})} stands for the
4567 product of the values of @var{num} and @var{expr}. For example,
4568 @code{(2 . in)} specifies a width of 2 inches, while @code{(0.5 .
4569 @var{image})} specifies half the width (or height) of the specified
4570 image.
4571
4572 The form @code{(+ @var{expr} ...)} adds up the value of the
4573 expressions. The form @code{(- @var{expr} ...)} negates or subtracts
4574 the value of the expressions.
4575
4576 @node Other Display Specs
4577 @subsection Other Display Specifications
4578
4579 Here are the other sorts of display specifications that you can use
4580 in the @code{display} text property.
4581
4582 @table @code
4583 @item @var{string}
4584 Display @var{string} instead of the text that has this property.
4585
4586 Recursive display specifications are not supported---@var{string}'s
4587 @code{display} properties, if any, are not used.
4588
4589 @item (image . @var{image-props})
4590 This kind of display specification is an image descriptor (@pxref{Images}).
4591 When used as a display specification, it means to display the image
4592 instead of the text that has the display specification.
4593
4594 @item (slice @var{x} @var{y} @var{width} @var{height})
4595 This specification together with @code{image} specifies a @dfn{slice}
4596 (a partial area) of the image to display. The elements @var{y} and
4597 @var{x} specify the top left corner of the slice, within the image;
4598 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the width and height of the
4599 slice. Integers are numbers of pixels. A floating-point number
4600 in the range 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height
4601 of the entire image.
4602
4603 @item ((margin nil) @var{string})
4604 A display specification of this form means to display @var{string}
4605 instead of the text that has the display specification, at the same
4606 position as that text. It is equivalent to using just @var{string},
4607 but it is done as a special case of marginal display (@pxref{Display
4608 Margins}).
4609
4610 @item (left-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4611 @itemx (right-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4612 This display specification on any character of a line of text causes
4613 the specified @var{bitmap} be displayed in the left or right fringes
4614 for that line, instead of the characters that have the display
4615 specification. The optional @var{face} specifies the colors to be
4616 used for the bitmap. @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for the details.
4617
4618 @item (space-width @var{factor})
4619 This display specification affects all the space characters within the
4620 text that has the specification. It displays all of these spaces
4621 @var{factor} times as wide as normal. The element @var{factor} should
4622 be an integer or float. Characters other than spaces are not affected
4623 at all; in particular, this has no effect on tab characters.
4624
4625 @item (height @var{height})
4626 This display specification makes the text taller or shorter.
4627 Here are the possibilities for @var{height}:
4628
4629 @table @asis
4630 @item @code{(+ @var{n})}
4631 @c FIXME: Add an index for "step"? --xfq
4632 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps larger. A @dfn{step} is
4633 defined by the set of available fonts---specifically, those that match
4634 what was otherwise specified for this text, in all attributes except
4635 height. Each size for which a suitable font is available counts as
4636 another step. @var{n} should be an integer.
4637
4638 @item @code{(- @var{n})}
4639 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps smaller.
4640
4641 @item a number, @var{factor}
4642 A number, @var{factor}, means to use a font that is @var{factor} times
4643 as tall as the default font.
4644
4645 @item a symbol, @var{function}
4646 A symbol is a function to compute the height. It is called with the
4647 current height as argument, and should return the new height to use.
4648
4649 @item anything else, @var{form}
4650 If the @var{height} value doesn't fit the previous possibilities, it is
4651 a form. Emacs evaluates it to get the new height, with the symbol
4652 @code{height} bound to the current specified font height.
4653 @end table
4654
4655 @item (raise @var{factor})
4656 This kind of display specification raises or lowers the text
4657 it applies to, relative to the baseline of the line.
4658
4659 @var{factor} must be a number, which is interpreted as a multiple of the
4660 height of the affected text. If it is positive, that means to display
4661 the characters raised. If it is negative, that means to display them
4662 lower down.
4663
4664 If the text also has a @code{height} display specification, that does
4665 not affect the amount of raising or lowering, which is based on the
4666 faces used for the text.
4667 @end table
4668
4669 @c We put all the '@code{(when ...)}' on one line to encourage
4670 @c makeinfo's end-of-sentence heuristics to DTRT. Previously, the dot
4671 @c was at eol; the info file ended up w/ two spaces rendered after it.
4672 You can make any display specification conditional. To do that,
4673 package it in another list of the form
4674 @code{(when @var{condition} . @var{spec})}.
4675 Then the specification @var{spec} applies only when
4676 @var{condition} evaluates to a non-@code{nil} value. During the
4677 evaluation, @code{object} is bound to the string or buffer having the
4678 conditional @code{display} property. @code{position} and
4679 @code{buffer-position} are bound to the position within @code{object}
4680 and the buffer position where the @code{display} property was found,
4681 respectively. Both positions can be different when @code{object} is a
4682 string.
4683
4684 @node Display Margins
4685 @subsection Displaying in the Margins
4686 @cindex display margins
4687 @cindex margins, display
4688
4689 A buffer can have blank areas called @dfn{display margins} on the
4690 left and on the right. Ordinary text never appears in these areas,
4691 but you can put things into the display margins using the
4692 @code{display} property. There is currently no way to make text or
4693 images in the margin mouse-sensitive.
4694
4695 The way to display something in the margins is to specify it in a
4696 margin display specification in the @code{display} property of some
4697 text. This is a replacing display specification, meaning that the
4698 text you put it on does not get displayed; the margin display appears,
4699 but that text does not.
4700
4701 A margin display specification looks like @code{((margin
4702 right-margin) @var{spec})} or @code{((margin left-margin) @var{spec})}.
4703 Here, @var{spec} is another display specification that says what to
4704 display in the margin. Typically it is a string of text to display,
4705 or an image descriptor.
4706
4707 To display something in the margin @emph{in association with}
4708 certain buffer text, without altering or preventing the display of
4709 that text, put a @code{before-string} property on the text and put the
4710 margin display specification on the contents of the before-string.
4711
4712 Before the display margins can display anything, you must give
4713 them a nonzero width. The usual way to do that is to set these
4714 variables:
4715
4716 @defvar left-margin-width
4717 This variable specifies the width of the left margin, in character
4718 cell (a.k.a.@: ``column'') units. It is buffer-local in all buffers.
4719 A value of @code{nil} means no left marginal area.
4720 @end defvar
4721
4722 @defvar right-margin-width
4723 This variable specifies the width of the right margin, in character
4724 cell units. It is buffer-local in all buffers. A value of @code{nil}
4725 means no right marginal area.
4726 @end defvar
4727
4728 Setting these variables does not immediately affect the window. These
4729 variables are checked when a new buffer is displayed in the window.
4730 Thus, you can make changes take effect by calling
4731 @code{set-window-buffer}.
4732
4733 You can also set the margin widths immediately.
4734
4735 @defun set-window-margins window left &optional right
4736 This function specifies the margin widths for window @var{window}, in
4737 character cell units. The argument @var{left} controls the left
4738 margin, and @var{right} controls the right margin (default @code{0}).
4739 @end defun
4740
4741 @defun window-margins &optional window
4742 This function returns the width of the left and right margins of
4743 @var{window} as a cons cell of the form @w{@code{(@var{left}
4744 . @var{right})}}. If one of the two marginal areas does not exist,
4745 its width is returned as @code{nil}; if neither of the two margins exist,
4746 the function returns @code{(nil)}. If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the
4747 selected window is used.
4748 @end defun
4749
4750 @node Images
4751 @section Images
4752 @cindex images in buffers
4753
4754 To display an image in an Emacs buffer, you must first create an image
4755 descriptor, then use it as a display specifier in the @code{display}
4756 property of text that is displayed (@pxref{Display Property}).
4757
4758 Emacs is usually able to display images when it is run on a
4759 graphical terminal. Images cannot be displayed in a text terminal, on
4760 certain graphical terminals that lack the support for this, or if
4761 Emacs is compiled without image support. You can use the function
4762 @code{display-images-p} to determine if images can in principle be
4763 displayed (@pxref{Display Feature Testing}).
4764
4765 @menu
4766 * Image Formats:: Supported image formats.
4767 * Image Descriptors:: How to specify an image for use in @code{:display}.
4768 * XBM Images:: Special features for XBM format.
4769 * XPM Images:: Special features for XPM format.
4770 * PostScript Images:: Special features for PostScript format.
4771 * ImageMagick Images:: Special features available through ImageMagick.
4772 * SVG Images:: Creating and manipulating SVG images.
4773 * Other Image Types:: Various other formats are supported.
4774 * Defining Images:: Convenient ways to define an image for later use.
4775 * Showing Images:: Convenient ways to display an image once it is defined.
4776 * Multi-Frame Images:: Some images contain more than one frame.
4777 * Image Cache:: Internal mechanisms of image display.
4778 @end menu
4779
4780 @node Image Formats
4781 @subsection Image Formats
4782 @cindex image formats
4783 @cindex image types
4784
4785 Emacs can display a number of different image formats. Some of
4786 these image formats are supported only if particular support libraries
4787 are installed. On some platforms, Emacs can load support libraries on
4788 demand; if so, the variable @code{dynamic-library-alist} can be used
4789 to modify the set of known names for these dynamic libraries.
4790 @xref{Dynamic Libraries}.
4791
4792 Supported image formats (and the required support libraries) include
4793 PBM and XBM (which do not depend on support libraries and are always
4794 available), XPM (@code{libXpm}), GIF (@code{libgif} or
4795 @code{libungif}), PostScript (@code{gs}), JPEG (@code{libjpeg}), TIFF
4796 (@code{libtiff}), PNG (@code{libpng}), and SVG (@code{librsvg}).
4797
4798 Each of these image formats is associated with an @dfn{image type
4799 symbol}. The symbols for the above formats are, respectively,
4800 @code{pbm}, @code{xbm}, @code{xpm}, @code{gif}, @code{postscript},
4801 @code{jpeg}, @code{tiff}, @code{png}, and @code{svg}.
4802
4803 Furthermore, if you build Emacs with ImageMagick
4804 (@code{libMagickWand}) support, Emacs can display any image format
4805 that ImageMagick can. @xref{ImageMagick Images}. All images
4806 displayed via ImageMagick have type symbol @code{imagemagick}.
4807
4808 @defvar image-types
4809 This variable contains a list of type symbols for image formats which
4810 are potentially supported in the current configuration.
4811
4812 ``Potentially'' means that Emacs knows about the image types, not
4813 necessarily that they can be used (for example, they could depend on
4814 unavailable dynamic libraries). To know which image types are really
4815 available, use @code{image-type-available-p}.
4816 @end defvar
4817
4818 @defun image-type-available-p type
4819 This function returns non-@code{nil} if images of type @var{type} can
4820 be loaded and displayed. @var{type} must be an image type symbol.
4821
4822 For image types whose support libraries are statically linked, this
4823 function always returns @code{t}. For image types whose support
4824 libraries are dynamically loaded, it returns @code{t} if the library
4825 could be loaded and @code{nil} otherwise.
4826 @end defun
4827
4828 @node Image Descriptors
4829 @subsection Image Descriptors
4830 @cindex image descriptor
4831
4832 An @dfn{image descriptor} is a list which specifies the underlying
4833 data for an image, and how to display it. It is typically used as the
4834 value of a @code{display} overlay or text property (@pxref{Other
4835 Display Specs}); but @xref{Showing Images}, for convenient helper
4836 functions to insert images into buffers.
4837
4838 Each image descriptor has the form @code{(image . @var{props})},
4839 where @var{props} is a property list of alternating keyword symbols
4840 and values, including at least the pair @code{:type @var{type}} that
4841 specifies the image type.
4842
4843 The following is a list of properties that are meaningful for all
4844 image types (there are also properties which are meaningful only for
4845 certain image types, as documented in the following subsections):
4846
4847 @table @code
4848 @item :type @var{type}
4849 The image type.
4850 @ifnottex
4851 @xref{Image Formats}.
4852 @end ifnottex
4853 Every image descriptor must include this property.
4854
4855 @item :file @var{file}
4856 This says to load the image from file @var{file}. If @var{file} is
4857 not an absolute file name, it is expanded in @code{data-directory}.
4858
4859 @item :data @var{data}
4860 This specifies the raw image data. Each image descriptor must have
4861 either @code{:data} or @code{:file}, but not both.
4862
4863 For most image types, the value of a @code{:data} property should be a
4864 string containing the image data. Some image types do not support
4865 @code{:data}; for some others, @code{:data} alone is not enough, so
4866 you need to use other image properties along with @code{:data}. See
4867 the following subsections for details.
4868
4869 @item :margin @var{margin}
4870 This specifies how many pixels to add as an extra margin around the
4871 image. The value, @var{margin}, must be a non-negative number, or a
4872 pair @code{(@var{x} . @var{y})} of such numbers. If it is a pair,
4873 @var{x} specifies how many pixels to add horizontally, and @var{y}
4874 specifies how many pixels to add vertically. If @code{:margin} is not
4875 specified, the default is zero.
4876
4877 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4878 This specifies the amount of the image's height to use for its
4879 ascent---that is, the part above the baseline. The value,
4880 @var{ascent}, must be a number in the range 0 to 100, or the symbol
4881 @code{center}.
4882
4883 If @var{ascent} is a number, that percentage of the image's height is
4884 used for its ascent.
4885
4886 If @var{ascent} is @code{center}, the image is vertically centered
4887 around a centerline which would be the vertical centerline of text drawn
4888 at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
4889 properties and overlays that apply to the image.
4890
4891 If this property is omitted, it defaults to 50.
4892
4893 @item :relief @var{relief}
4894 This adds a shadow rectangle around the image. The value,
4895 @var{relief}, specifies the width of the shadow lines, in pixels. If
4896 @var{relief} is negative, shadows are drawn so that the image appears
4897 as a pressed button; otherwise, it appears as an unpressed button.
4898
4899 @item :conversion @var{algorithm}
4900 This specifies a conversion algorithm that should be applied to the
4901 image before it is displayed; the value, @var{algorithm}, specifies
4902 which algorithm.
4903
4904 @table @code
4905 @item laplace
4906 @itemx emboss
4907 Specifies the Laplace edge detection algorithm, which blurs out small
4908 differences in color while highlighting larger differences. People
4909 sometimes consider this useful for displaying the image for a
4910 disabled button.
4911
4912 @item (edge-detection :matrix @var{matrix} :color-adjust @var{adjust})
4913 @cindex edge detection, images
4914 Specifies a general edge-detection algorithm. @var{matrix} must be
4915 either a nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel
4916 at position @math{x/y} in the transformed image is computed from
4917 original pixels around that position. @var{matrix} specifies, for each
4918 pixel in the neighborhood of @math{x/y}, a factor with which that pixel
4919 will influence the transformed pixel; element @math{0} specifies the
4920 factor for the pixel at @math{x-1/y-1}, element @math{1} the factor for
4921 the pixel at @math{x/y-1} etc., as shown below:
4922 @iftex
4923 @tex
4924 $$\pmatrix{x-1/y-1 & x/y-1 & x+1/y-1 \cr
4925 x-1/y & x/y & x+1/y \cr
4926 x-1/y+1& x/y+1 & x+1/y+1 \cr}$$
4927 @end tex
4928 @end iftex
4929 @ifnottex
4930 @display
4931 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
4932 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
4933 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
4934 @end display
4935 @end ifnottex
4936
4937 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
4938 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
4939 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
4940 of the factors' absolute values.
4941
4942 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
4943 @iftex
4944 @tex
4945 $$\pmatrix{1 & 0 & 0 \cr
4946 0& 0 & 0 \cr
4947 0 & 0 & -1 \cr}$$
4948 @end tex
4949 @end iftex
4950 @ifnottex
4951 @display
4952 (1 0 0
4953 0 0 0
4954 0 0 -1)
4955 @end display
4956 @end ifnottex
4957
4958 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
4959 @iftex
4960 @tex
4961 $$\pmatrix{ 2 & -1 & 0 \cr
4962 -1 & 0 & 1 \cr
4963 0 & 1 & -2 \cr}$$
4964 @end tex
4965 @end iftex
4966 @ifnottex
4967 @display
4968 ( 2 -1 0
4969 -1 0 1
4970 0 1 -2)
4971 @end display
4972 @end ifnottex
4973
4974 @item disabled
4975 Specifies transforming the image so that it looks disabled.
4976 @end table
4977
4978 @item :mask @var{mask}
4979 If @var{mask} is @code{heuristic} or @code{(heuristic @var{bg})}, build
4980 a clipping mask for the image, so that the background of a frame is
4981 visible behind the image. If @var{bg} is not specified, or if @var{bg}
4982 is @code{t}, determine the background color of the image by looking at
4983 the four corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occurring
4984 color from the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise,
4985 @var{bg} must be a list @code{(@var{red} @var{green} @var{blue})}
4986 specifying the color to assume for the background of the image.
4987
4988 If @var{mask} is @code{nil}, remove a mask from the image, if it has
4989 one. Images in some formats include a mask which can be removed by
4990 specifying @code{:mask nil}.
4991
4992 @item :pointer @var{shape}
4993 This specifies the pointer shape when the mouse pointer is over this
4994 image. @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
4995
4996 @item :map @var{map}
4997 @cindex image maps
4998 This associates an image map of @dfn{hot spots} with this image.
4999
5000 An image map is an alist where each element has the format
5001 @code{(@var{area} @var{id} @var{plist})}. An @var{area} is specified
5002 as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon.
5003
5004 A rectangle is a cons
5005 @code{(rect . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . (@var{x1} . @var{y1})))}
5006 which specifies the pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right
5007 corners of the rectangle area.
5008
5009 A circle is a cons
5010 @code{(circle . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . @var{r}))}
5011 which specifies the center and the radius of the circle; @var{r} may
5012 be a float or integer.
5013
5014 A polygon is a cons
5015 @code{(poly . [@var{x0} @var{y0} @var{x1} @var{y1} ...])}
5016 where each pair in the vector describes one corner in the polygon.
5017
5018 When the mouse pointer lies on a hot-spot area of an image, the
5019 @var{plist} of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a @code{help-echo}
5020 property, that defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
5021 a @code{pointer} property, that defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
5022 it is on the hot-spot.
5023 @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
5024
5025 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot, an
5026 event is composed by combining the @var{id} of the hot-spot with the
5027 mouse event; for instance, @code{[area4 mouse-1]} if the hot-spot's
5028 @var{id} is @code{area4}.
5029 @end table
5030
5031 @defun image-mask-p spec &optional frame
5032 This function returns @code{t} if image @var{spec} has a mask bitmap.
5033 @var{frame} is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
5034 @var{frame} @code{nil} or omitted means to use the selected frame
5035 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5036 @end defun
5037
5038 @node XBM Images
5039 @subsection XBM Images
5040 @cindex XBM
5041
5042 To use XBM format, specify @code{xbm} as the image type. This image
5043 format doesn't require an external library, so images of this type are
5044 always supported.
5045
5046 Additional image properties supported for the @code{xbm} image type are:
5047
5048 @table @code
5049 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5050 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5051 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5052 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5053 foreground color.
5054
5055 @item :background @var{background}
5056 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5057 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5058 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5059 background color.
5060 @end table
5061
5062 If you specify an XBM image using data within Emacs instead of an
5063 external file, use the following three properties:
5064
5065 @table @code
5066 @item :data @var{data}
5067 The value, @var{data}, specifies the contents of the image.
5068 There are three formats you can use for @var{data}:
5069
5070 @itemize @bullet
5071 @item
5072 A vector of strings or bool-vectors, each specifying one line of the
5073 image. Do specify @code{:height} and @code{:width}.
5074
5075 @item
5076 A string containing the same byte sequence as an XBM file would contain.
5077 You must not specify @code{:height} and @code{:width} in this case,
5078 because omitting them is what indicates the data has the format of an
5079 XBM file. The file contents specify the height and width of the image.
5080
5081 @item
5082 A string or a bool-vector containing the bits of the image (plus perhaps
5083 some extra bits at the end that will not be used). It should contain at
5084 least @var{width} * @code{height} bits. In this case, you must specify
5085 @code{:height} and @code{:width}, both to indicate that the string
5086 contains just the bits rather than a whole XBM file, and to specify the
5087 size of the image.
5088 @end itemize
5089
5090 @item :width @var{width}
5091 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image, in pixels.
5092
5093 @item :height @var{height}
5094 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image, in pixels.
5095 @end table
5096
5097 @node XPM Images
5098 @subsection XPM Images
5099 @cindex XPM
5100
5101 To use XPM format, specify @code{xpm} as the image type. The
5102 additional image property @code{:color-symbols} is also meaningful with
5103 the @code{xpm} image type:
5104
5105 @table @code
5106 @item :color-symbols @var{symbols}
5107 The value, @var{symbols}, should be an alist whose elements have the
5108 form @code{(@var{name} . @var{color})}. In each element, @var{name} is
5109 the name of a color as it appears in the image file, and @var{color}
5110 specifies the actual color to use for displaying that name.
5111 @end table
5112
5113 @node PostScript Images
5114 @subsection PostScript Images
5115 @cindex postscript images
5116
5117 To use PostScript for an image, specify image type @code{postscript}.
5118 This works only if you have Ghostscript installed. You must always use
5119 these three properties:
5120
5121 @table @code
5122 @item :pt-width @var{width}
5123 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image measured in
5124 points (1/72 inch). @var{width} must be an integer.
5125
5126 @item :pt-height @var{height}
5127 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image in points
5128 (1/72 inch). @var{height} must be an integer.
5129
5130 @item :bounding-box @var{box}
5131 The value, @var{box}, must be a list or vector of four integers, which
5132 specifying the bounding box of the PostScript image, analogous to the
5133 @samp{BoundingBox} comment found in PostScript files.
5134
5135 @example
5136 %%BoundingBox: 22 171 567 738
5137 @end example
5138 @end table
5139
5140 @node ImageMagick Images
5141 @subsection ImageMagick Images
5142 @cindex ImageMagick images
5143 @cindex images, support for more formats
5144
5145 If your Emacs build has ImageMagick support, you can use the
5146 ImageMagick library to load many image formats (@pxref{File
5147 Conveniences,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}). The image type symbol
5148 for images loaded via ImageMagick is @code{imagemagick}, regardless of
5149 the actual underlying image format.
5150
5151 To check for ImageMagick support, use the following:
5152
5153 @lisp
5154 (image-type-available-p 'imagemagick)
5155 @end lisp
5156
5157 @defun imagemagick-types
5158 This function returns a list of image file extensions supported by the
5159 current ImageMagick installation. Each list element is a symbol
5160 representing an internal ImageMagick name for an image type, such as
5161 @code{BMP} for @file{.bmp} images.
5162 @end defun
5163
5164 @defopt imagemagick-enabled-types
5165 The value of this variable is a list of ImageMagick image types which
5166 Emacs may attempt to render using ImageMagick. Each list element
5167 should be one of the symbols in the list returned by
5168 @code{imagemagick-types}, or an equivalent string. Alternatively, a
5169 value of @code{t} enables ImageMagick for all possible image types.
5170 Regardless of the value of this variable,
5171 @code{imagemagick-types-inhibit} (see below) takes precedence.
5172 @end defopt
5173
5174 @defopt imagemagick-types-inhibit
5175 The value of this variable lists the ImageMagick image types which
5176 should never be rendered using ImageMagick, regardless of the value of
5177 @code{imagemagick-enabled-types}. A value of @code{t} disables
5178 ImageMagick entirely.
5179 @end defopt
5180
5181 @defvar image-format-suffixes
5182 This variable is an alist mapping image types to file name extensions.
5183 Emacs uses this in conjunction with the @code{:format} image property
5184 (see below) to give a hint to the ImageMagick library as to the type
5185 of an image. Each element has the form @code{(@var{type}
5186 @var{extension})}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying an image
5187 content-type, and @var{extension} is a string that specifies the
5188 associated file name extension.
5189 @end defvar
5190
5191 Images loaded with ImageMagick support the following additional
5192 image descriptor properties:
5193
5194 @table @code
5195 @item :background @var{background}
5196 @var{background}, if non-@code{nil}, should be a string specifying a
5197 color, which is used as the image's background color if the image
5198 supports transparency. If the value is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5199 frame's background color.
5200
5201 @item :width @var{width}, :height @var{height}
5202 The @code{:width} and @code{:height} keywords are used for scaling the
5203 image. If only one of them is specified, the other one will be
5204 calculated so as to preserve the aspect ratio. If both are specified,
5205 aspect ratio may not be preserved.
5206
5207 @item :max-width @var{max-width}, :max-height @var{max-height}
5208 The @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} keywords are used for
5209 scaling if the size of the image of the image exceeds these values.
5210 If @code{:width} is set it will have precedence over @code{max-width},
5211 and if @code{:height} is set it will have precedence over
5212 @code{max-height}, but you can otherwise mix these keywords as you
5213 wish. @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} will always preserve
5214 the aspect ratio.
5215
5216 @item :scale @var{scale}
5217 This should be a number, where values higher than 1 means to increase
5218 the size, and lower means to decrease the size. For instance, a value
5219 of 0.25 will make the image a quarter size of what it originally was.
5220 If the scaling makes the image larger than specified by
5221 @code{:max-width} or @code{:max-height}, the resulting size will not
5222 exceed those two values. If both @code{:scale} and
5223 @code{:height}/@code{:width} are specified, the height/width will be
5224 adjusted by the specified scaling factor.
5225
5226 @item :format @var{type}
5227 The value, @var{type}, should be a symbol specifying the type of the
5228 image data, as found in @code{image-format-suffixes}. This is used
5229 when the image does not have an associated file name, to provide a
5230 hint to ImageMagick to help it detect the image type.
5231
5232 @item :rotation @var{angle}
5233 Specifies a rotation angle in degrees.
5234
5235 @item :index @var{frame}
5236 @c Doesn't work: http://debbugs.gnu.org/7978
5237 @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5238 @end table
5239
5240 @node SVG Images
5241 @subsection SVG Images
5242 @cindex SVG images
5243
5244 SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) is an XML format for specifying images.
5245 If your Emacs build has with SVG support, you can create and manipulate
5246 these images with the following commands.
5247
5248 @defun svg-create width height &rest args
5249 Create a new, empty SVG image with the specified dimensions.
5250 @var{args} is an argument plist with you can specify following:
5251
5252 @table @code
5253 @item :stroke-width
5254 The default width (in pixels) of any lines created.
5255
5256 @item :stroke
5257 The default stroke color on any lines created.
5258 @end table
5259
5260 This function returns an SVG structure, and all the following commands
5261 work on that structure.
5262 @end defun
5263
5264 @defun svg-gradient svg id type stops
5265 Create a gradient in @var{svg} with identifier @var{id}. @var{type}
5266 specifies the gradient type, and can be either @code{linear} or
5267 @code{radial}. @var{stops} is a list of percentage/color pairs.
5268
5269 The following will create a linear gradient that goes from red at the
5270 start, to green 25% of the way, to blue at the end:
5271
5272 @lisp
5273 (svg-gradient svg "gradient1" 'linear
5274 '((0 . "red") (25 . "green") (100 . "blue")))
5275 @end lisp
5276
5277 The gradient created (and inserted into the SVG object) can later be
5278 used by all functions that create shapes.
5279 @end defun
5280
5281 All the following functions take an optional list of keyword
5282 parameters that alter the various attributes from their default
5283 values. Valid attributes include:
5284
5285 @table @code
5286 @item :stroke-width
5287 The width (in pixels) of lines drawn, and outlines around solid
5288 shapes.
5289
5290 @item :stroke-color
5291 The color of lines drawn, and outlines around solid shapes.
5292
5293 @item :fill-color
5294 The color used for solid shapes.
5295
5296 @item :id
5297 The identified of the shape.
5298
5299 @item :gradient
5300 If given, this should be the identifier of a previously defined
5301 gradient object.
5302 @end table
5303
5304 @defun svg-rectangle svg x y width height &rest args
5305 Add a rectangle to @var{svg} where the upper left corner is at
5306 position @var{x}/@var{y} and is of size @var{width}/@var{height}.
5307
5308 @lisp
5309 (svg-rectangle svg 100 100 500 500 :gradient "gradient1")
5310 @end lisp
5311 @end defun
5312
5313 @defun svg-circle svg x y radius &rest args
5314 Add a circle to @var{svg} where the center is at @var{x}/@var{y}
5315 and the radius is @var{radius}.
5316 @end defun
5317
5318 @defun svg-ellipse svg x y x-radius y-radius &rest args
5319 Add a circle to @var{svg} where the center is at @var{x}/@var{y} and
5320 the horizontal radius is @var{x-radius} and the vertical radius is
5321 @var{y-radius}.
5322 @end defun
5323
5324 @defun svg-line svg x1 y1 x2 y2 &rest args
5325 Add a line to @var{svg} that starts at @var{x1}/@var{y1} and extends
5326 to @var{x2}/@var{y2}.
5327 @end defun
5328
5329 @defun svg-polyline svg points &rest args
5330 Add a multiple segment line to @var{svg} that goes through
5331 @var{points}, which is a list of X/Y position pairs.
5332
5333 @lisp
5334 (svg-polyline svg '((200 . 100) (500 . 450) (80 . 100))
5335 :stroke-color "green")
5336 @end lisp
5337 @end defun
5338
5339 @defun svg-polygon svg points &rest args
5340 Add a polygon to @var{svg} where @var{points} is a list of X/Y pairs
5341 that describe the outer circumference of the polygon.
5342
5343 @lisp
5344 (svg-polygon svg '((100 . 100) (200 . 150) (150 . 90))
5345 :stroke-color "blue" :fill-color "red"")
5346 @end lisp
5347 @end defun
5348
5349 Finally, the @code{svg-image} takes an SVG object as its parameter and
5350 returns an image object suitable for use in functions like
5351 @code{insert-image}. Here's a complete example that creates and
5352 inserts an image with a circle:
5353
5354 @lisp
5355 (let ((svg (svg-create 400 400 :stroke-width 10)))
5356 (svg-gradient svg "gradient1" 'linear '((0 . "red") (100 . "blue")))
5357 (svg-circle svg 200 200 100 :gradient "gradient1" :stroke-color "green")
5358 (insert-image (svg-image svg)))
5359 @end lisp
5360
5361
5362 @node Other Image Types
5363 @subsection Other Image Types
5364 @cindex PBM
5365
5366 For PBM images, specify image type @code{pbm}. Color, gray-scale and
5367 monochromatic images are supported. For mono PBM images, two additional
5368 image properties are supported.
5369
5370 @table @code
5371 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5372 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5373 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5374 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5375 foreground color.
5376
5377 @item :background @var{background}
5378 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5379 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5380 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5381 background color.
5382 @end table
5383
5384 @noindent
5385 The remaining image types that Emacs can support are:
5386
5387 @table @asis
5388 @item GIF
5389 Image type @code{gif}.
5390 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5391
5392 @item JPEG
5393 Image type @code{jpeg}.
5394
5395 @item PNG
5396 Image type @code{png}.
5397
5398 @item TIFF
5399 Image type @code{tiff}.
5400 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5401 @end table
5402
5403 @node Defining Images
5404 @subsection Defining Images
5405 @cindex define image
5406
5407 The functions @code{create-image}, @code{defimage} and
5408 @code{find-image} provide convenient ways to create image descriptors.
5409
5410 @defun create-image file-or-data &optional type data-p &rest props
5411 This function creates and returns an image descriptor which uses the
5412 data in @var{file-or-data}. @var{file-or-data} can be a file name or
5413 a string containing the image data; @var{data-p} should be @code{nil}
5414 for the former case, non-@code{nil} for the latter case.
5415
5416 The optional argument @var{type} is a symbol specifying the image type.
5417 If @var{type} is omitted or @code{nil}, @code{create-image} tries to
5418 determine the image type from the file's first few bytes, or else
5419 from the file's name.
5420
5421 The remaining arguments, @var{props}, specify additional image
5422 properties---for example,
5423
5424 @c ':heuristic-mask' is not documented?
5425 @example
5426 (create-image "foo.xpm" 'xpm nil :heuristic-mask t)
5427 @end example
5428
5429 The function returns @code{nil} if images of this type are not
5430 supported. Otherwise it returns an image descriptor.
5431 @end defun
5432
5433 @defmac defimage symbol specs &optional doc
5434 This macro defines @var{symbol} as an image name. The arguments
5435 @var{specs} is a list which specifies how to display the image.
5436 The third argument, @var{doc}, is an optional documentation string.
5437
5438 Each argument in @var{specs} has the form of a property list, and each
5439 one should specify at least the @code{:type} property and either the
5440 @code{:file} or the @code{:data} property. The value of @code{:type}
5441 should be a symbol specifying the image type, the value of
5442 @code{:file} is the file to load the image from, and the value of
5443 @code{:data} is a string containing the actual image data. Here is an
5444 example:
5445
5446 @example
5447 (defimage test-image
5448 ((:type xpm :file "~/test1.xpm")
5449 (:type xbm :file "~/test1.xbm")))
5450 @end example
5451
5452 @code{defimage} tests each argument, one by one, to see if it is
5453 usable---that is, if the type is supported and the file exists. The
5454 first usable argument is used to make an image descriptor which is
5455 stored in @var{symbol}.
5456
5457 If none of the alternatives will work, then @var{symbol} is defined
5458 as @code{nil}.
5459 @end defmac
5460
5461 @defun image-property image property
5462 Return the value of @var{property} in @var{image}. Properties can be
5463 set by using @code{setf}. Setting a property to @code{nil} will
5464 remove the property from the image.
5465 @end defun
5466
5467 @defun find-image specs
5468 This function provides a convenient way to find an image satisfying one
5469 of a list of image specifications @var{specs}.
5470
5471 Each specification in @var{specs} is a property list with contents
5472 depending on image type. All specifications must at least contain the
5473 properties @code{:type @var{type}} and either @w{@code{:file @var{file}}}
5474 or @w{@code{:data @var{data}}}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying
5475 the image type, e.g., @code{xbm}, @var{file} is the file to load the
5476 image from, and @var{data} is a string containing the actual image data.
5477 The first specification in the list whose @var{type} is supported, and
5478 @var{file} exists, is used to construct the image specification to be
5479 returned. If no specification is satisfied, @code{nil} is returned.
5480
5481 The image is looked for in @code{image-load-path}.
5482 @end defun
5483
5484 @defopt image-load-path
5485 This variable's value is a list of locations in which to search for
5486 image files. If an element is a string or a variable symbol whose
5487 value is a string, the string is taken to be the name of a directory
5488 to search. If an element is a variable symbol whose value is a list,
5489 that is taken to be a list of directory names to search.
5490
5491 The default is to search in the @file{images} subdirectory of the
5492 directory specified by @code{data-directory}, then the directory
5493 specified by @code{data-directory}, and finally in the directories in
5494 @code{load-path}. Subdirectories are not automatically included in
5495 the search, so if you put an image file in a subdirectory, you have to
5496 supply the subdirectory name explicitly. For example, to find the
5497 image @file{images/foo/bar.xpm} within @code{data-directory}, you
5498 should specify the image as follows:
5499
5500 @example
5501 (defimage foo-image '((:type xpm :file "foo/bar.xpm")))
5502 @end example
5503 @end defopt
5504
5505 @defun image-load-path-for-library library image &optional path no-error
5506 This function returns a suitable search path for images used by the
5507 Lisp package @var{library}.
5508
5509 The function searches for @var{image} first using @code{image-load-path},
5510 excluding @file{@code{data-directory}/images}, and then in
5511 @code{load-path}, followed by a path suitable for @var{library}, which
5512 includes @file{../../etc/images} and @file{../etc/images} relative to
5513 the library file itself, and finally in
5514 @file{@code{data-directory}/images}.
5515
5516 Then this function returns a list of directories which contains first
5517 the directory in which @var{image} was found, followed by the value of
5518 @code{load-path}. If @var{path} is given, it is used instead of
5519 @code{load-path}.
5520
5521 If @var{no-error} is non-@code{nil} and a suitable path can't be
5522 found, don't signal an error. Instead, return a list of directories as
5523 before, except that @code{nil} appears in place of the image directory.
5524
5525 Here is an example of using @code{image-load-path-for-library}:
5526
5527 @example
5528 (defvar image-load-path) ; shush compiler
5529 (let* ((load-path (image-load-path-for-library
5530 "mh-e" "mh-logo.xpm"))
5531 (image-load-path (cons (car load-path)
5532 image-load-path)))
5533 (mh-tool-bar-folder-buttons-init))
5534 @end example
5535 @end defun
5536
5537 @vindex image-scaling-factor
5538 Images are automatically scaled when created based on the
5539 @code{image-scaling-factor} variable. The value is either a floating
5540 point number (where numbers higher than 1 means to increase the size
5541 and lower means to shrink the size), or the symbol @code{auto}, which
5542 will compute a scaling factor based on the font pixel size.
5543
5544 @node Showing Images
5545 @subsection Showing Images
5546 @cindex show image
5547
5548 You can use an image descriptor by setting up the @code{display}
5549 property yourself, but it is easier to use the functions in this
5550 section.
5551
5552 @defun insert-image image &optional string area slice
5553 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point. The
5554 value @var{image} should be an image descriptor; it could be a value
5555 returned by @code{create-image}, or the value of a symbol defined with
5556 @code{defimage}. The argument @var{string} specifies the text to put
5557 in the buffer to hold the image. If it is omitted or @code{nil},
5558 @code{insert-image} uses @code{" "} by default.
5559
5560 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5561 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5562 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5563 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5564 buffer's text.
5565
5566 The argument @var{slice} specifies a slice of the image to insert. If
5567 @var{slice} is @code{nil} or omitted the whole image is inserted.
5568 Otherwise, @var{slice} is a list @code{(@var{x} @var{y} @var{width}
5569 @var{height})} which specifies the @var{x} and @var{y} positions and
5570 @var{width} and @var{height} of the image area to insert. Integer
5571 values are in units of pixels. A floating-point number in the range
5572 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height of the entire
5573 image.
5574
5575 Internally, this function inserts @var{string} in the buffer, and gives
5576 it a @code{display} property which specifies @var{image}. @xref{Display
5577 Property}.
5578 @end defun
5579
5580 @cindex slice, image
5581 @cindex image slice
5582 @defun insert-sliced-image image &optional string area rows cols
5583 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point, like
5584 @code{insert-image}, but splits the image into @var{rows}x@var{cols}
5585 equally sized slices.
5586
5587 Emacs displays each slice as a
5588 separate image, and allows more intuitive scrolling up/down, instead of
5589 jumping up/down the entire image when paging through a buffer that
5590 displays (large) images.
5591 @end defun
5592
5593 @defun put-image image pos &optional string area
5594 This function puts image @var{image} in front of @var{pos} in the
5595 current buffer. The argument @var{pos} should be an integer or a
5596 marker. It specifies the buffer position where the image should appear.
5597 The argument @var{string} specifies the text that should hold the image
5598 as an alternative to the default.
5599
5600 The argument @var{image} must be an image descriptor, perhaps returned
5601 by @code{create-image} or stored by @code{defimage}.
5602
5603 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5604 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5605 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5606 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5607 buffer's text.
5608
5609 Internally, this function creates an overlay, and gives it a
5610 @code{before-string} property containing text that has a @code{display}
5611 property whose value is the image. (Whew!)
5612 @end defun
5613
5614 @defun remove-images start end &optional buffer
5615 This function removes images in @var{buffer} between positions
5616 @var{start} and @var{end}. If @var{buffer} is omitted or @code{nil},
5617 images are removed from the current buffer.
5618
5619 This removes only images that were put into @var{buffer} the way
5620 @code{put-image} does it, not images that were inserted with
5621 @code{insert-image} or in other ways.
5622 @end defun
5623
5624 @defun image-size spec &optional pixels frame
5625 @cindex size of image
5626 This function returns the size of an image as a pair
5627 @w{@code{(@var{width} . @var{height})}}. @var{spec} is an image
5628 specification. @var{pixels} non-@code{nil} means return sizes measured
5629 in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in the default character size
5630 of @var{frame} (@pxref{Frame Font}). @var{frame} is the frame on which
5631 the image will be displayed. @var{frame} null or omitted means use the
5632 selected frame (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5633 @end defun
5634
5635 @defvar max-image-size
5636 This variable is used to define the maximum size of image that Emacs
5637 will load. Emacs will refuse to load (and display) any image that is
5638 larger than this limit.
5639
5640 If the value is an integer, it directly specifies the maximum
5641 image height and width, measured in pixels. If it is floating
5642 point, it specifies the maximum image height and width
5643 as a ratio to the frame height and width. If the value is
5644 non-numeric, there is no explicit limit on the size of images.
5645
5646 The purpose of this variable is to prevent unreasonably large images
5647 from accidentally being loaded into Emacs. It only takes effect the
5648 first time an image is loaded. Once an image is placed in the image
5649 cache, it can always be displayed, even if the value of
5650 @code{max-image-size} is subsequently changed (@pxref{Image Cache}).
5651 @end defvar
5652
5653 Images inserted with the insertion functions above also get a local
5654 keymap installed in the text properties (or overlays) that span the
5655 displayed image. This keymap defines the following commands:
5656
5657 @table @kbd
5658 @item +
5659 Increase the image size (@code{image-increase-size}). A prefix value
5660 of @samp{4} means to increase the size by 40%. The default is 20%.
5661
5662 @item -
5663 Decrease the image size (@code{image-increase-size}). A prefix value
5664 of @samp{4} means to decrease the size by 40%. The default is 20%.
5665
5666 @item r
5667 Rotate the image by 90 degrees (@code{image-rotate}).
5668
5669 @item o
5670 Save the image to a file (@code{image-save}).
5671 @end table
5672
5673 @node Multi-Frame Images
5674 @subsection Multi-Frame Images
5675 @cindex multi-frame images
5676
5677 @cindex animation
5678 @cindex image animation
5679 @cindex image frames
5680 Some image files can contain more than one image. We say that there
5681 are multiple ``frames'' in the image. At present, Emacs supports
5682 multiple frames for GIF, TIFF, and certain ImageMagick formats such as
5683 DJVM@.
5684
5685 The frames can be used either to represent multiple pages (this is
5686 usually the case with multi-frame TIFF files, for example), or to
5687 create animation (usually the case with multi-frame GIF files).
5688
5689 A multi-frame image has a property @code{:index}, whose value is an
5690 integer (counting from 0) that specifies which frame is being displayed.
5691
5692 @defun image-multi-frame-p image
5693 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{image} contains more than
5694 one frame. The actual return value is a cons @code{(@var{nimages}
5695 . @var{delay})}, where @var{nimages} is the number of frames and
5696 @var{delay} is the delay in seconds between them, or @code{nil}
5697 if the image does not specify a delay. Images that are intended to be
5698 animated usually specify a frame delay, whereas ones that are intended
5699 to be treated as multiple pages do not.
5700 @end defun
5701
5702 @defun image-current-frame image
5703 This function returns the index of the current frame number for
5704 @var{image}, counting from 0.
5705 @end defun
5706
5707 @defun image-show-frame image n &optional nocheck
5708 This function switches @var{image} to frame number @var{n}. It
5709 replaces a frame number outside the valid range with that of the end
5710 of the range, unless @var{nocheck} is non-@code{nil}. If @var{image}
5711 does not contain a frame with the specified number, the image displays
5712 as a hollow box.
5713 @end defun
5714
5715 @defun image-animate image &optional index limit
5716 This function animates @var{image}. The optional integer @var{index}
5717 specifies the frame from which to start (default 0). The optional
5718 argument @var{limit} controls the length of the animation. If omitted
5719 or @code{nil}, the image animates once only; if @code{t} it loops
5720 forever; if a number animation stops after that many seconds.
5721 @end defun
5722
5723 @vindex image-minimum-frame-delay
5724 @vindex image-default-frame-delay
5725 @noindent Animation operates by means of a timer. Note that Emacs imposes a
5726 minimum frame delay of 0.01 (@code{image-minimum-frame-delay}) seconds.
5727 If the image itself does not specify a delay, Emacs uses
5728 @code{image-default-frame-delay}.
5729
5730 @defun image-animate-timer image
5731 This function returns the timer responsible for animating @var{image},
5732 if there is one.
5733 @end defun
5734
5735
5736 @node Image Cache
5737 @subsection Image Cache
5738 @cindex image cache
5739
5740 Emacs caches images so that it can display them again more
5741 efficiently. When Emacs displays an image, it searches the image
5742 cache for an existing image specification @code{equal} to the desired
5743 specification. If a match is found, the image is displayed from the
5744 cache. Otherwise, Emacs loads the image normally.
5745
5746 @defun image-flush spec &optional frame
5747 This function removes the image with specification @var{spec} from the
5748 image cache of frame @var{frame}. Image specifications are compared
5749 using @code{equal}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5750 selected frame. If @var{frame} is @code{t}, the image is flushed on
5751 all existing frames.
5752
5753 In Emacs's current implementation, each graphical terminal possesses an
5754 image cache, which is shared by all the frames on that terminal
5755 (@pxref{Multiple Terminals}). Thus, refreshing an image in one frame
5756 also refreshes it in all other frames on the same terminal.
5757 @end defun
5758
5759 One use for @code{image-flush} is to tell Emacs about a change in an
5760 image file. If an image specification contains a @code{:file}
5761 property, the image is cached based on the file's contents when the
5762 image is first displayed. Even if the file subsequently changes,
5763 Emacs continues displaying the old version of the image. Calling
5764 @code{image-flush} flushes the image from the cache, forcing Emacs to
5765 re-read the file the next time it needs to display that image.
5766
5767 Another use for @code{image-flush} is for memory conservation. If
5768 your Lisp program creates a large number of temporary images over a
5769 period much shorter than @code{image-cache-eviction-delay} (see
5770 below), you can opt to flush unused images yourself, instead of
5771 waiting for Emacs to do it automatically.
5772
5773 @defun clear-image-cache &optional filter
5774 This function clears an image cache, removing all the images stored in
5775 it. If @var{filter} is omitted or @code{nil}, it clears the cache for
5776 the selected frame. If @var{filter} is a frame, it clears the cache
5777 for that frame. If @var{filter} is @code{t}, all image caches are
5778 cleared. Otherwise, @var{filter} is taken to be a file name, and all
5779 images associated with that file name are removed from all image
5780 caches.
5781 @end defun
5782
5783 If an image in the image cache has not been displayed for a specified
5784 period of time, Emacs removes it from the cache and frees the
5785 associated memory.
5786
5787 @defvar image-cache-eviction-delay
5788 This variable specifies the number of seconds an image can remain in
5789 the cache without being displayed. When an image is not displayed for
5790 this length of time, Emacs removes it from the image cache.
5791
5792 Under some circumstances, if the number of images in the cache grows
5793 too large, the actual eviction delay may be shorter than this.
5794
5795 If the value is @code{nil}, Emacs does not remove images from the cache
5796 except when you explicitly clear it. This mode can be useful for
5797 debugging.
5798 @end defvar
5799
5800 @node Xwidgets
5801 @section Embedded Native Widgets
5802 @cindex xwidget
5803 @cindex embedded widgets
5804 @cindex webkit browser widget
5805
5806 Emacs is able to display native widgets, such as GTK WebKit widgets,
5807 in Emacs buffers when it was built with the necessary support
5808 libraries and is running on a graphical terminal. To test whether
5809 Emacs supports display of embedded widgets, check that the
5810 @code{xwidget-internal} feature is available (@pxref{Named Features}).
5811
5812 To display an embedded widget in a buffer, you must first create an
5813 xwidget object, and then use that object as the display specifier
5814 in a @code{display} text or overlay property (@pxref{Display
5815 Property}).
5816
5817 @defun make-xwidget type title width height arguments &optional buffer
5818 This creates and returns an xwidget object. If
5819 @var{buffer} is omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the current
5820 buffer. If @var{buffer} names a buffer that doesn't exist, it will be
5821 created. The @var{type} identifies the type of the xwidget component,
5822 it can be one of the following:
5823
5824 @table @code
5825 @item webkit
5826 The WebKit component.
5827 @end table
5828
5829 The @var{width} and @var{height} arguments specify the widget size in
5830 pixels, and @var{title}, a string, specifies its title.
5831 @end defun
5832
5833 @defun xwidgetp object
5834 This function returns @code{t} if @var{object} is an xwidget,
5835 @code{nil} otherwise.
5836 @end defun
5837
5838 @defun xwidget-plist xwidget
5839 This function returns the property list of @var{xwidget}.
5840 @end defun
5841
5842 @defun set-xwidget-plist xwidget plist
5843 This function replaces the property list of @var{xwidget} with a new
5844 property list given by @var{plist}.
5845 @end defun
5846
5847 @defun xwidget-buffer xwidget
5848 This function returns the buffer of @var{xwidget}.
5849 @end defun
5850
5851 @defun get-buffer-xwidgets buffer
5852 This function returns a list of xwidget objects associated with the
5853 @var{buffer}, which can be specified as a buffer object or a name of
5854 an existing buffer, a string. The value is @code{nil} if @var{buffer}
5855 contains no xwidgets.
5856 @end defun
5857
5858 @defun xwidget-webkit-goto-uri xwidget uri
5859 This function browses the specified @var{uri} in the given
5860 @var{xwidget}. The @var{uri} is a string that specifies the name of a
5861 file or a URL. @c FIXME: What else can a URI specify in this context?
5862 @end defun
5863
5864 @defun xwidget-webkit-execute-script xwidget script
5865 This function causes the browser widget specified by @var{xwidget} to
5866 execute the specified JavaScript @code{script}.
5867 @end defun
5868
5869 @defun xwidget-webkit-execute-script-rv xwidget script &optional default
5870 This function executes the specified @var{script} like
5871 @code{xwidget-webkit-execute-script} does, but it also returns the
5872 script's return value as a string. If @var{script} doesn't return a
5873 value, this function returns @var{default}, or @code{nil} if
5874 @var{default} was omitted.
5875 @end defun
5876
5877 @defun xwidget-webkit-get-title xwidget
5878 This function returns the title of @var{xwidget} as a string.
5879 @end defun
5880
5881 @defun xwidget-resize xwidget width height
5882 This function resizes the specified @var{xwidget} to the size
5883 @var{width}x@var{height} pixels.
5884 @end defun
5885
5886 @defun xwidget-size-request xwidget
5887 This function returns the desired size of @var{xwidget} as a list of
5888 the form @code{(@var{width} @var{height})}. The dimensions are in
5889 pixels.
5890 @end defun
5891
5892 @defun xwidget-info xwidget
5893 This function returns the attributes of @var{xwidget} as a vector of
5894 the form @code{[@var{type} @var{title} @var{width} @var{height}]}.
5895 The attributes are usually determined by @code{make-xwidget} when the
5896 xwidget is created.
5897 @end defun
5898
5899 @defun set-xwidget-query-on-exit-flag xwidget flag
5900 This function allows you to arrange that Emacs will ask the user for
5901 confirmation before exiting or before killing a buffer that has
5902 @var{xwidget} associated with it. If @var{flag} is non-@code{nil},
5903 Emacs will query the user, otherwise it will not.
5904 @end defun
5905
5906 @defun xwidget-query-on-exit-flag xwidget
5907 This function returns the current setting of @var{xwidget}s
5908 query-on-exit flag, either @code{t} or @code{nil}.
5909 @end defun
5910
5911 @node Buttons
5912 @section Buttons
5913 @cindex buttons in buffers
5914 @cindex clickable buttons in buffers
5915
5916 The Button package defines functions for inserting and manipulating
5917 @dfn{buttons} that can be activated with the mouse or via keyboard
5918 commands. These buttons are typically used for various kinds of
5919 hyperlinks.
5920
5921 A button is essentially a set of text or overlay properties,
5922 attached to a stretch of text in a buffer. These properties are
5923 called @dfn{button properties}. One of these properties, the
5924 @dfn{action property}, specifies a function which is called when the
5925 user invokes the button using the keyboard or the mouse. The action
5926 function may examine the button and use its other properties as
5927 desired.
5928
5929 In some ways, the Button package duplicates the functionality in the
5930 Widget package. @xref{Top, , Introduction, widget, The Emacs Widget
5931 Library}. The advantage of the Button package is that it is faster,
5932 smaller, and simpler to program. From the point of view of the user,
5933 the interfaces produced by the two packages are very similar.
5934
5935 @menu
5936 * Button Properties:: Button properties with special meanings.
5937 * Button Types:: Defining common properties for classes of buttons.
5938 * Making Buttons:: Adding buttons to Emacs buffers.
5939 * Manipulating Buttons:: Getting and setting properties of buttons.
5940 * Button Buffer Commands:: Buffer-wide commands and bindings for buttons.
5941 @end menu
5942
5943 @node Button Properties
5944 @subsection Button Properties
5945 @cindex button properties
5946
5947 Each button has an associated list of properties defining its
5948 appearance and behavior, and other arbitrary properties may be used
5949 for application specific purposes. The following properties have
5950 special meaning to the Button package:
5951
5952 @table @code
5953 @item action
5954 @kindex action @r{(button property)}
5955 The function to call when the user invokes the button, which is passed
5956 the single argument @var{button}. By default this is @code{ignore},
5957 which does nothing.
5958
5959 @item mouse-action
5960 @kindex mouse-action @r{(button property)}
5961 This is similar to @code{action}, and when present, will be used
5962 instead of @code{action} for button invocations resulting from
5963 mouse-clicks (instead of the user hitting @key{RET}). If not
5964 present, mouse-clicks use @code{action} instead.
5965
5966 @item face
5967 @kindex face @r{(button property)}
5968 This is an Emacs face controlling how buttons of this type are
5969 displayed; by default this is the @code{button} face.
5970
5971 @item mouse-face
5972 @kindex mouse-face @r{(button property)}
5973 This is an additional face which controls appearance during
5974 mouse-overs (merged with the usual button face); by default this is
5975 the usual Emacs @code{highlight} face.
5976
5977 @item keymap
5978 @kindex keymap @r{(button property)}
5979 The button's keymap, defining bindings active within the button
5980 region. By default this is the usual button region keymap, stored
5981 in the variable @code{button-map}, which defines @key{RET} and
5982 @key{mouse-2} to invoke the button.
5983
5984 @item type
5985 @kindex type @r{(button property)}
5986 The button type. @xref{Button Types}.
5987
5988 @item help-echo
5989 @kindex help-index @r{(button property)}
5990 A string displayed by the Emacs tool-tip help system; by default,
5991 @code{"mouse-2, RET: Push this button"}.
5992
5993 @item follow-link
5994 @kindex follow-link @r{(button property)}
5995 The follow-link property, defining how a @key{mouse-1} click behaves
5996 on this button, @xref{Clickable Text}.
5997
5998 @item button
5999 @kindex button @r{(button property)}
6000 All buttons have a non-@code{nil} @code{button} property, which may be useful
6001 in finding regions of text that comprise buttons (which is what the
6002 standard button functions do).
6003 @end table
6004
6005 There are other properties defined for the regions of text in a
6006 button, but these are not generally interesting for typical uses.
6007
6008 @node Button Types
6009 @subsection Button Types
6010 @cindex button types
6011
6012 Every button has a @dfn{button type}, which defines default values
6013 for the button's properties. Button types are arranged in a
6014 hierarchy, with specialized types inheriting from more general types,
6015 so that it's easy to define special-purpose types of buttons for
6016 specific tasks.
6017
6018 @defun define-button-type name &rest properties
6019 Define a button type called @var{name} (a symbol).
6020 The remaining arguments
6021 form a sequence of @var{property value} pairs, specifying default
6022 property values for buttons with this type (a button's type may be set
6023 by giving it a @code{type} property when creating the button, using
6024 the @code{:type} keyword argument).
6025
6026 In addition, the keyword argument @code{:supertype} may be used to
6027 specify a button-type from which @var{name} inherits its default
6028 property values. Note that this inheritance happens only when
6029 @var{name} is defined; subsequent changes to a supertype are not
6030 reflected in its subtypes.
6031 @end defun
6032
6033 Using @code{define-button-type} to define default properties for
6034 buttons is not necessary---buttons without any specified type use the
6035 built-in button-type @code{button}---but it is encouraged, since
6036 doing so usually makes the resulting code clearer and more efficient.
6037
6038 @node Making Buttons
6039 @subsection Making Buttons
6040 @cindex making buttons
6041
6042 Buttons are associated with a region of text, using an overlay or
6043 text properties to hold button-specific information, all of which are
6044 initialized from the button's type (which defaults to the built-in
6045 button type @code{button}). Like all Emacs text, the appearance of
6046 the button is governed by the @code{face} property; by default (via
6047 the @code{face} property inherited from the @code{button} button-type)
6048 this is a simple underline, like a typical web-page link.
6049
6050 For convenience, there are two sorts of button-creation functions,
6051 those that add button properties to an existing region of a buffer,
6052 called @code{make-...button}, and those that also insert the button
6053 text, called @code{insert-...button}.
6054
6055 The button-creation functions all take the @code{&rest} argument
6056 @var{properties}, which should be a sequence of @var{property value}
6057 pairs, specifying properties to add to the button; see @ref{Button
6058 Properties}. In addition, the keyword argument @code{:type} may be
6059 used to specify a button-type from which to inherit other properties;
6060 see @ref{Button Types}. Any properties not explicitly specified
6061 during creation will be inherited from the button's type (if the type
6062 defines such a property).
6063
6064 The following functions add a button using an overlay
6065 (@pxref{Overlays}) to hold the button properties:
6066
6067 @defun make-button beg end &rest properties
6068 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the
6069 current buffer, and returns it.
6070 @end defun
6071
6072 @defun insert-button label &rest properties
6073 This insert a button with the label @var{label} at point,
6074 and returns it.
6075 @end defun
6076
6077 The following functions are similar, but using text properties
6078 (@pxref{Text Properties}) to hold the button properties. Such buttons
6079 do not add markers to the buffer, so editing in the buffer does not
6080 slow down if there is an extremely large numbers of buttons. However,
6081 if there is an existing face text property on the text (e.g., a face
6082 assigned by Font Lock mode), the button face may not be visible. Both
6083 of these functions return the starting position of the new button.
6084
6085 @defun make-text-button beg end &rest properties
6086 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the current buffer,
6087 using text properties.
6088 @end defun
6089
6090 @defun insert-text-button label &rest properties
6091 This inserts a button with the label @var{label} at point, using text
6092 properties.
6093 @end defun
6094
6095 @node Manipulating Buttons
6096 @subsection Manipulating Buttons
6097 @cindex manipulating buttons
6098
6099 These are functions for getting and setting properties of buttons.
6100 Often these are used by a button's invocation function to determine
6101 what to do.
6102
6103 Where a @var{button} parameter is specified, it means an object
6104 referring to a specific button, either an overlay (for overlay
6105 buttons), or a buffer-position or marker (for text property buttons).
6106 Such an object is passed as the first argument to a button's
6107 invocation function when it is invoked.
6108
6109 @defun button-start button
6110 Return the position at which @var{button} starts.
6111 @end defun
6112
6113 @defun button-end button
6114 Return the position at which @var{button} ends.
6115 @end defun
6116
6117 @defun button-get button prop
6118 Get the property of button @var{button} named @var{prop}.
6119 @end defun
6120
6121 @defun button-put button prop val
6122 Set @var{button}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
6123 @end defun
6124
6125 @defun button-activate button &optional use-mouse-action
6126 Call @var{button}'s @code{action} property (i.e., invoke the function
6127 that is the value of that property, passing it the single argument
6128 @var{button}). If @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, try to
6129 invoke the button's @code{mouse-action} property instead of
6130 @code{action}; if the button has no @code{mouse-action} property, use
6131 @code{action} as normal.
6132 @end defun
6133
6134 @defun button-label button
6135 Return @var{button}'s text label.
6136 @end defun
6137
6138 @defun button-type button
6139 Return @var{button}'s button-type.
6140 @end defun
6141
6142 @defun button-has-type-p button type
6143 Return @code{t} if @var{button} has button-type @var{type}, or one of
6144 @var{type}'s subtypes.
6145 @end defun
6146
6147 @defun button-at pos
6148 Return the button at position @var{pos} in the current buffer, or
6149 @code{nil}. If the button at @var{pos} is a text property button, the
6150 return value is a marker pointing to @var{pos}.
6151 @end defun
6152
6153 @defun button-type-put type prop val
6154 Set the button-type @var{type}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
6155 @end defun
6156
6157 @defun button-type-get type prop
6158 Get the property of button-type @var{type} named @var{prop}.
6159 @end defun
6160
6161 @defun button-type-subtype-p type supertype
6162 Return @code{t} if button-type @var{type} is a subtype of @var{supertype}.
6163 @end defun
6164
6165 @node Button Buffer Commands
6166 @subsection Button Buffer Commands
6167 @cindex button buffer commands
6168
6169 These are commands and functions for locating and operating on
6170 buttons in an Emacs buffer.
6171
6172 @code{push-button} is the command that a user uses to actually push
6173 a button, and is bound by default in the button itself to @key{RET}
6174 and to @key{mouse-2} using a local keymap in the button's overlay or
6175 text properties. Commands that are useful outside the buttons itself,
6176 such as @code{forward-button} and @code{backward-button} are
6177 additionally available in the keymap stored in
6178 @code{button-buffer-map}; a mode which uses buttons may want to use
6179 @code{button-buffer-map} as a parent keymap for its keymap.
6180
6181 If the button has a non-@code{nil} @code{follow-link} property, and
6182 @code{mouse-1-click-follows-link} is set, a quick @key{mouse-1} click
6183 will also activate the @code{push-button} command.
6184 @xref{Clickable Text}.
6185
6186 @deffn Command push-button &optional pos use-mouse-action
6187 Perform the action specified by a button at location @var{pos}.
6188 @var{pos} may be either a buffer position or a mouse-event. If
6189 @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, or @var{pos} is a
6190 mouse-event (@pxref{Mouse Events}), try to invoke the button's
6191 @code{mouse-action} property instead of @code{action}; if the button
6192 has no @code{mouse-action} property, use @code{action} as normal.
6193 @var{pos} defaults to point, except when @code{push-button} is invoked
6194 interactively as the result of a mouse-event, in which case, the mouse
6195 event's position is used. If there's no button at @var{pos}, do
6196 nothing and return @code{nil}, otherwise return @code{t}.
6197 @end deffn
6198
6199 @deffn Command forward-button n &optional wrap display-message
6200 Move to the @var{n}th next button, or @var{n}th previous button if
6201 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
6202 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
6203 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
6204 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
6205 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
6206 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
6207 @end deffn
6208
6209 @deffn Command backward-button n &optional wrap display-message
6210 Move to the @var{n}th previous button, or @var{n}th next button if
6211 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
6212 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
6213 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
6214 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
6215 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
6216 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
6217 @end deffn
6218
6219 @defun next-button pos &optional count-current
6220 @defunx previous-button pos &optional count-current
6221 Return the next button after (for @code{next-button}) or before (for
6222 @code{previous-button}) position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If
6223 @var{count-current} is non-@code{nil}, count any button at @var{pos}
6224 in the search, instead of starting at the next button.
6225 @end defun
6226
6227 @node Abstract Display
6228 @section Abstract Display
6229 @cindex ewoc
6230 @cindex display, abstract
6231 @cindex display, arbitrary objects
6232 @cindex model/view/controller
6233 @cindex view part, model/view/controller
6234
6235 The Ewoc package constructs buffer text that represents a structure
6236 of Lisp objects, and updates the text to follow changes in that
6237 structure. This is like the ``view'' component in the
6238 ``model--view--controller'' design paradigm. Ewoc means ``Emacs's
6239 Widget for Object Collections''.
6240
6241 An @dfn{ewoc} is a structure that organizes information required to
6242 construct buffer text that represents certain Lisp data. The buffer
6243 text of the ewoc has three parts, in order: first, fixed @dfn{header}
6244 text; next, textual descriptions of a series of data elements (Lisp
6245 objects that you specify); and last, fixed @dfn{footer} text.
6246 Specifically, an ewoc contains information on:
6247
6248 @itemize @bullet
6249 @item
6250 The buffer which its text is generated in.
6251
6252 @item
6253 The text's start position in the buffer.
6254
6255 @item
6256 The header and footer strings.
6257
6258 @item
6259 @cindex node, ewoc
6260 @c or "@cindex node, abstract display"?
6261 A doubly-linked chain of @dfn{nodes}, each of which contains:
6262
6263 @itemize
6264 @item
6265 A @dfn{data element}, a single Lisp object.
6266
6267 @item
6268 Links to the preceding and following nodes in the chain.
6269 @end itemize
6270
6271 @item
6272 A @dfn{pretty-printer} function which is responsible for
6273 inserting the textual representation of a data
6274 element value into the current buffer.
6275 @end itemize
6276
6277 Typically, you define an ewoc with @code{ewoc-create}, and then pass
6278 the resulting ewoc structure to other functions in the Ewoc package to
6279 build nodes within it, and display it in the buffer. Once it is
6280 displayed in the buffer, other functions determine the correspondence
6281 between buffer positions and nodes, move point from one node's textual
6282 representation to another, and so forth. @xref{Abstract Display
6283 Functions}.
6284
6285 @cindex encapsulation, ewoc
6286 @c or "@cindex encapsulation, abstract display"?
6287 A node @dfn{encapsulates} a data element much the way a variable
6288 holds a value. Normally, encapsulation occurs as a part of adding a
6289 node to the ewoc. You can retrieve the data element value and place a
6290 new value in its place, like so:
6291
6292 @lisp
6293 (ewoc-data @var{node})
6294 @result{} value
6295
6296 (ewoc-set-data @var{node} @var{new-value})
6297 @result{} @var{new-value}
6298 @end lisp
6299
6300 @noindent
6301 You can also use, as the data element value, a Lisp object (list or
6302 vector) that is a container for the real value, or an index into
6303 some other structure. The example (@pxref{Abstract Display Example})
6304 uses the latter approach.
6305
6306 When the data changes, you will want to update the text in the
6307 buffer. You can update all nodes by calling @code{ewoc-refresh}, or
6308 just specific nodes using @code{ewoc-invalidate}, or all nodes
6309 satisfying a predicate using @code{ewoc-map}. Alternatively, you can
6310 delete invalid nodes using @code{ewoc-delete} or @code{ewoc-filter},
6311 and add new nodes in their place. Deleting a node from an ewoc deletes
6312 its associated textual description from buffer, as well.
6313
6314 @menu
6315 * Abstract Display Functions:: Functions in the Ewoc package.
6316 * Abstract Display Example:: Example of using Ewoc.
6317 @end menu
6318
6319 @node Abstract Display Functions
6320 @subsection Abstract Display Functions
6321
6322 In this subsection, @var{ewoc} and @var{node} stand for the
6323 structures described above (@pxref{Abstract Display}), while
6324 @var{data} stands for an arbitrary Lisp object used as a data element.
6325
6326 @defun ewoc-create pretty-printer &optional header footer nosep
6327 This constructs and returns a new ewoc, with no nodes (and thus no data
6328 elements). @var{pretty-printer} should be a function that takes one
6329 argument, a data element of the sort you plan to use in this ewoc, and
6330 inserts its textual description at point using @code{insert} (and never
6331 @code{insert-before-markers}, because that would interfere with the
6332 Ewoc package's internal mechanisms).
6333
6334 Normally, a newline is automatically inserted after the header,
6335 the footer and every node's textual description. If @var{nosep}
6336 is non-@code{nil}, no newline is inserted. This may be useful for
6337 displaying an entire ewoc on a single line, for example, or for
6338 making nodes invisible by arranging for @var{pretty-printer}
6339 to do nothing for those nodes.
6340
6341 An ewoc maintains its text in the buffer that is current when
6342 you create it, so switch to the intended buffer before calling
6343 @code{ewoc-create}.
6344 @end defun
6345
6346 @defun ewoc-buffer ewoc
6347 This returns the buffer where @var{ewoc} maintains its text.
6348 @end defun
6349
6350 @defun ewoc-get-hf ewoc
6351 This returns a cons cell @code{(@var{header} . @var{footer})}
6352 made from @var{ewoc}'s header and footer.
6353 @end defun
6354
6355 @defun ewoc-set-hf ewoc header footer
6356 This sets the header and footer of @var{ewoc} to the strings
6357 @var{header} and @var{footer}, respectively.
6358 @end defun
6359
6360 @defun ewoc-enter-first ewoc data
6361 @defunx ewoc-enter-last ewoc data
6362 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, putting it, respectively,
6363 at the beginning or end of @var{ewoc}'s chain of nodes.
6364 @end defun
6365
6366 @defun ewoc-enter-before ewoc node data
6367 @defunx ewoc-enter-after ewoc node data
6368 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, adding it to
6369 @var{ewoc} before or after @var{node}, respectively.
6370 @end defun
6371
6372 @defun ewoc-prev ewoc node
6373 @defunx ewoc-next ewoc node
6374 These return, respectively, the previous node and the next node of @var{node}
6375 in @var{ewoc}.
6376 @end defun
6377
6378 @defun ewoc-nth ewoc n
6379 This returns the node in @var{ewoc} found at zero-based index @var{n}.
6380 A negative @var{n} means count from the end. @code{ewoc-nth} returns
6381 @code{nil} if @var{n} is out of range.
6382 @end defun
6383
6384 @defun ewoc-data node
6385 This extracts the data encapsulated by @var{node} and returns it.
6386 @end defun
6387
6388 @defun ewoc-set-data node data
6389 This sets the data encapsulated by @var{node} to @var{data}.
6390 @end defun
6391
6392 @defun ewoc-locate ewoc &optional pos guess
6393 This determines the node in @var{ewoc} which contains point (or
6394 @var{pos} if specified), and returns that node. If @var{ewoc} has no
6395 nodes, it returns @code{nil}. If @var{pos} is before the first node,
6396 it returns the first node; if @var{pos} is after the last node, it returns
6397 the last node. The optional third arg @var{guess}
6398 should be a node that is likely to be near @var{pos}; this doesn't
6399 alter the result, but makes the function run faster.
6400 @end defun
6401
6402 @defun ewoc-location node
6403 This returns the start position of @var{node}.
6404 @end defun
6405
6406 @defun ewoc-goto-prev ewoc arg
6407 @defunx ewoc-goto-next ewoc arg
6408 These move point to the previous or next, respectively, @var{arg}th node
6409 in @var{ewoc}. @code{ewoc-goto-prev} does not move if it is already at
6410 the first node or if @var{ewoc} is empty, whereas @code{ewoc-goto-next}
6411 moves past the last node, returning @code{nil}. Excepting this special
6412 case, these functions return the node moved to.
6413 @end defun
6414
6415 @defun ewoc-goto-node ewoc node
6416 This moves point to the start of @var{node} in @var{ewoc}.
6417 @end defun
6418
6419 @defun ewoc-refresh ewoc
6420 This function regenerates the text of @var{ewoc}. It works by
6421 deleting the text between the header and the footer, i.e., all the
6422 data elements' representations, and then calling the pretty-printer
6423 function for each node, one by one, in order.
6424 @end defun
6425
6426 @defun ewoc-invalidate ewoc &rest nodes
6427 This is similar to @code{ewoc-refresh}, except that only @var{nodes} in
6428 @var{ewoc} are updated instead of the entire set.
6429 @end defun
6430
6431 @defun ewoc-delete ewoc &rest nodes
6432 This deletes each node in @var{nodes} from @var{ewoc}.
6433 @end defun
6434
6435 @defun ewoc-filter ewoc predicate &rest args
6436 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6437 deletes those nodes for which @var{predicate} returns @code{nil}.
6438 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6439 @end defun
6440
6441 @defun ewoc-collect ewoc predicate &rest args
6442 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc}
6443 and returns a list of those elements for which @var{predicate}
6444 returns non-@code{nil}. The elements in the list are ordered
6445 as in the buffer. Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6446 @end defun
6447
6448 @defun ewoc-map map-function ewoc &rest args
6449 This calls @var{map-function} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6450 updates those nodes for which @var{map-function} returns non-@code{nil}.
6451 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{map-function}.
6452 @end defun
6453
6454 @node Abstract Display Example
6455 @subsection Abstract Display Example
6456
6457 Here is a simple example using functions of the ewoc package to
6458 implement a @dfn{color components} display, an area in a buffer that
6459 represents a vector of three integers (itself representing a 24-bit RGB
6460 value) in various ways.
6461
6462 @example
6463 (setq colorcomp-ewoc nil
6464 colorcomp-data nil
6465 colorcomp-mode-map nil
6466 colorcomp-labels ["Red" "Green" "Blue"])
6467
6468 (defun colorcomp-pp (data)
6469 (if data
6470 (let ((comp (aref colorcomp-data data)))
6471 (insert (aref colorcomp-labels data) "\t: #x"
6472 (format "%02X" comp) " "
6473 (make-string (ash comp -2) ?#) "\n"))
6474 (let ((cstr (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6475 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6476 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6477 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6478 (samp " (sample text) "))
6479 (insert "Color\t: "
6480 (propertize samp 'face
6481 `(foreground-color . ,cstr))
6482 (propertize samp 'face
6483 `(background-color . ,cstr))
6484 "\n"))))
6485
6486 (defun colorcomp (color)
6487 "Allow fiddling with COLOR in a new buffer.
6488 The buffer is in Color Components mode."
6489 (interactive "sColor (name or #RGB or #RRGGBB): ")
6490 (when (string= "" color)
6491 (setq color "green"))
6492 (unless (color-values color)
6493 (error "No such color: %S" color))
6494 (switch-to-buffer
6495 (generate-new-buffer (format "originally: %s" color)))
6496 (kill-all-local-variables)
6497 (setq major-mode 'colorcomp-mode
6498 mode-name "Color Components")
6499 (use-local-map colorcomp-mode-map)
6500 (erase-buffer)
6501 (buffer-disable-undo)
6502 (let ((data (apply 'vector (mapcar (lambda (n) (ash n -8))
6503 (color-values color))))
6504 (ewoc (ewoc-create 'colorcomp-pp
6505 "\nColor Components\n\n"
6506 (substitute-command-keys
6507 "\n\\@{colorcomp-mode-map@}"))))
6508 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-data) data)
6509 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-ewoc) ewoc)
6510 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 0)
6511 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 1)
6512 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 2)
6513 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc nil)))
6514 @end example
6515
6516 @cindex controller part, model/view/controller
6517 This example can be extended to be a color selection widget (in
6518 other words, the ``controller'' part of the ``model--view--controller''
6519 design paradigm) by defining commands to modify @code{colorcomp-data}
6520 and to finish the selection process, and a keymap to tie it all
6521 together conveniently.
6522
6523 @smallexample
6524 (defun colorcomp-mod (index limit delta)
6525 (let ((cur (aref colorcomp-data index)))
6526 (unless (= limit cur)
6527 (aset colorcomp-data index (+ cur delta)))
6528 (ewoc-invalidate
6529 colorcomp-ewoc
6530 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc index)
6531 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc -1))))
6532
6533 (defun colorcomp-R-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 255 1))
6534 (defun colorcomp-G-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 255 1))
6535 (defun colorcomp-B-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 255 1))
6536 (defun colorcomp-R-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 0 -1))
6537 (defun colorcomp-G-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 0 -1))
6538 (defun colorcomp-B-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 0 -1))
6539
6540 (defun colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit ()
6541 "Copy the color components into the kill ring and kill the buffer.
6542 The string is formatted #RRGGBB (hash followed by six hex digits)."
6543 (interactive)
6544 (kill-new (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6545 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6546 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6547 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6548 (kill-buffer nil))
6549
6550 (setq colorcomp-mode-map
6551 (let ((m (make-sparse-keymap)))
6552 (suppress-keymap m)
6553 (define-key m "i" 'colorcomp-R-less)
6554 (define-key m "o" 'colorcomp-R-more)
6555 (define-key m "k" 'colorcomp-G-less)
6556 (define-key m "l" 'colorcomp-G-more)
6557 (define-key m "," 'colorcomp-B-less)
6558 (define-key m "." 'colorcomp-B-more)
6559 (define-key m " " 'colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit)
6560 m))
6561 @end smallexample
6562
6563 Note that we never modify the data in each node, which is fixed when the
6564 ewoc is created to be either @code{nil} or an index into the vector
6565 @code{colorcomp-data}, the actual color components.
6566
6567 @node Blinking
6568 @section Blinking Parentheses
6569 @cindex parenthesis matching
6570 @cindex blinking parentheses
6571 @cindex balancing parentheses
6572
6573 This section describes the mechanism by which Emacs shows a matching
6574 open parenthesis when the user inserts a close parenthesis.
6575
6576 @defvar blink-paren-function
6577 The value of this variable should be a function (of no arguments) to
6578 be called whenever a character with close parenthesis syntax is inserted.
6579 The value of @code{blink-paren-function} may be @code{nil}, in which
6580 case nothing is done.
6581 @end defvar
6582
6583 @defopt blink-matching-paren
6584 If this variable is @code{nil}, then @code{blink-matching-open} does
6585 nothing.
6586 @end defopt
6587
6588 @defopt blink-matching-paren-distance
6589 This variable specifies the maximum distance to scan for a matching
6590 parenthesis before giving up.
6591 @end defopt
6592
6593 @defopt blink-matching-delay
6594 This variable specifies the number of seconds to keep indicating the
6595 matching parenthesis. A fraction of a second often gives good
6596 results, but the default is 1, which works on all systems.
6597 @end defopt
6598
6599 @deffn Command blink-matching-open
6600 This function is the default value of @code{blink-paren-function}. It
6601 assumes that point follows a character with close parenthesis syntax
6602 and applies the appropriate effect momentarily to the matching opening
6603 character. If that character is not already on the screen, it
6604 displays the character's context in the echo area. To avoid long
6605 delays, this function does not search farther than
6606 @code{blink-matching-paren-distance} characters.
6607
6608 Here is an example of calling this function explicitly.
6609
6610 @smallexample
6611 @group
6612 (defun interactive-blink-matching-open ()
6613 "Indicate momentarily the start of parenthesized sexp before point."
6614 (interactive)
6615 @end group
6616 @group
6617 (let ((blink-matching-paren-distance
6618 (buffer-size))
6619 (blink-matching-paren t))
6620 (blink-matching-open)))
6621 @end group
6622 @end smallexample
6623 @end deffn
6624
6625 @node Character Display
6626 @section Character Display
6627
6628 This section describes how characters are actually displayed by
6629 Emacs. Typically, a character is displayed as a @dfn{glyph} (a
6630 graphical symbol which occupies one character position on the screen),
6631 whose appearance corresponds to the character itself. For example,
6632 the character @samp{a} (character code 97) is displayed as @samp{a}.
6633 Some characters, however, are displayed specially. For example, the
6634 formfeed character (character code 12) is usually displayed as a
6635 sequence of two glyphs, @samp{^L}, while the newline character
6636 (character code 10) starts a new screen line.
6637
6638 You can modify how each character is displayed by defining a
6639 @dfn{display table}, which maps each character code into a sequence of
6640 glyphs. @xref{Display Tables}.
6641
6642 @menu
6643 * Usual Display:: The usual conventions for displaying characters.
6644 * Display Tables:: What a display table consists of.
6645 * Active Display Table:: How Emacs selects a display table to use.
6646 * Glyphs:: How to define a glyph, and what glyphs mean.
6647 * Glyphless Chars:: How glyphless characters are drawn.
6648 @end menu
6649
6650 @node Usual Display
6651 @subsection Usual Display Conventions
6652
6653 Here are the conventions for displaying each character code (in the
6654 absence of a display table, which can override these
6655 @iftex
6656 conventions).
6657 @end iftex
6658 @ifnottex
6659 conventions; @pxref{Display Tables}).
6660 @end ifnottex
6661
6662 @cindex printable ASCII characters
6663 @itemize @bullet
6664 @item
6665 The @dfn{printable @acronym{ASCII} characters}, character codes 32
6666 through 126 (consisting of numerals, English letters, and symbols like
6667 @samp{#}) are displayed literally.
6668
6669 @item
6670 The tab character (character code 9) displays as whitespace stretching
6671 up to the next tab stop column. @xref{Text Display,,, emacs, The GNU
6672 Emacs Manual}. The variable @code{tab-width} controls the number of
6673 spaces per tab stop (see below).
6674
6675 @item
6676 The newline character (character code 10) has a special effect: it
6677 ends the preceding line and starts a new line.
6678
6679 @cindex ASCII control characters
6680 @item
6681 The non-printable @dfn{@acronym{ASCII} control characters}---character
6682 codes 0 through 31, as well as the @key{DEL} character (character code
6683 127)---display in one of two ways according to the variable
6684 @code{ctl-arrow}. If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default),
6685 these characters are displayed as sequences of two glyphs, where the
6686 first glyph is @samp{^} (a display table can specify a glyph to use
6687 instead of @samp{^}); e.g., the @key{DEL} character is displayed as
6688 @samp{^?}.
6689
6690 If @code{ctl-arrow} is @code{nil}, these characters are displayed as
6691 octal escapes (see below).
6692
6693 This rule also applies to carriage return (character code 13), if that
6694 character appears in the buffer. But carriage returns usually do not
6695 appear in buffer text; they are eliminated as part of end-of-line
6696 conversion (@pxref{Coding System Basics}).
6697
6698 @cindex octal escapes
6699 @item
6700 @dfn{Raw bytes} are non-@acronym{ASCII} characters with codes 128
6701 through 255 (@pxref{Text Representations}). These characters display
6702 as @dfn{octal escapes}: sequences of four glyphs, where the first
6703 glyph is the @acronym{ASCII} code for @samp{\}, and the others are
6704 digit characters representing the character code in octal. (A display
6705 table can specify a glyph to use instead of @samp{\}.)
6706
6707 @item
6708 Each non-@acronym{ASCII} character with code above 255 is displayed
6709 literally, if the terminal supports it. If the terminal does not
6710 support it, the character is said to be @dfn{glyphless}, and it is
6711 usually displayed using a placeholder glyph. For example, if a
6712 graphical terminal has no font for a character, Emacs usually displays
6713 a box containing the character code in hexadecimal. @xref{Glyphless
6714 Chars}.
6715 @end itemize
6716
6717 The above display conventions apply even when there is a display
6718 table, for any character whose entry in the active display table is
6719 @code{nil}. Thus, when you set up a display table, you need only
6720 specify the characters for which you want special behavior.
6721
6722 The following variables affect how certain characters are displayed
6723 on the screen. Since they change the number of columns the characters
6724 occupy, they also affect the indentation functions. They also affect
6725 how the mode line is displayed; if you want to force redisplay of the
6726 mode line using the new values, call the function
6727 @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6728
6729 @defopt ctl-arrow
6730 @cindex control characters in display
6731 This buffer-local variable controls how control characters are
6732 displayed. If it is non-@code{nil}, they are displayed as a caret
6733 followed by the character: @samp{^A}. If it is @code{nil}, they are
6734 displayed as octal escapes: a backslash followed by three octal
6735 digits, as in @samp{\001}.
6736 @end defopt
6737
6738 @defopt tab-width
6739 The value of this buffer-local variable is the spacing between tab
6740 stops used for displaying tab characters in Emacs buffers. The value
6741 is in units of columns, and the default is 8. Note that this feature
6742 is completely independent of the user-settable tab stops used by the
6743 command @code{tab-to-tab-stop}. @xref{Indent Tabs}.
6744 @end defopt
6745
6746 @node Display Tables
6747 @subsection Display Tables
6748
6749 @cindex display table
6750 A display table is a special-purpose char-table
6751 (@pxref{Char-Tables}), with @code{display-table} as its subtype, which
6752 is used to override the usual character display conventions. This
6753 section describes how to make, inspect, and assign elements to a
6754 display table object.
6755
6756 @defun make-display-table
6757 This creates and returns a display table. The table initially has
6758 @code{nil} in all elements.
6759 @end defun
6760
6761 The ordinary elements of the display table are indexed by character
6762 codes; the element at index @var{c} says how to display the character
6763 code @var{c}. The value should be @code{nil} (which means to display
6764 the character @var{c} according to the usual display conventions;
6765 @pxref{Usual Display}), or a vector of glyph codes (which means to
6766 display the character @var{c} as those glyphs; @pxref{Glyphs}).
6767
6768 @strong{Warning:} if you use the display table to change the display
6769 of newline characters, the whole buffer will be displayed as one long
6770 line.
6771
6772 The display table also has six @dfn{extra slots} which serve special
6773 purposes. Here is a table of their meanings; @code{nil} in any slot
6774 means to use the default for that slot, as stated below.
6775
6776 @table @asis
6777 @item 0
6778 The glyph for the end of a truncated screen line (the default for this
6779 is @samp{$}). @xref{Glyphs}. On graphical terminals, Emacs uses
6780 arrows in the fringes to indicate truncation, so the display table has
6781 no effect.
6782
6783 @item 1
6784 The glyph for the end of a continued line (the default is @samp{\}).
6785 On graphical terminals, Emacs uses curved arrows in the fringes to
6786 indicate continuation, so the display table has no effect.
6787
6788 @item 2
6789 The glyph for indicating a character displayed as an octal character
6790 code (the default is @samp{\}).
6791
6792 @item 3
6793 The glyph for indicating a control character (the default is @samp{^}).
6794
6795 @item 4
6796 A vector of glyphs for indicating the presence of invisible lines (the
6797 default is @samp{...}). @xref{Selective Display}.
6798
6799 @item 5
6800 The glyph used to draw the border between side-by-side windows (the
6801 default is @samp{|}). @xref{Splitting Windows}. This takes effect only
6802 when there are no scroll bars; if scroll bars are supported and in use,
6803 a scroll bar separates the two windows.
6804 @end table
6805
6806 For example, here is how to construct a display table that mimics
6807 the effect of setting @code{ctl-arrow} to a non-@code{nil} value
6808 (@pxref{Glyphs}, for the function @code{make-glyph-code}):
6809
6810 @example
6811 (setq disptab (make-display-table))
6812 (dotimes (i 32)
6813 (or (= i ?\t)
6814 (= i ?\n)
6815 (aset disptab i
6816 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6817 (make-glyph-code (+ i 64) 'escape-glyph)))))
6818 (aset disptab 127
6819 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6820 (make-glyph-code ?? 'escape-glyph)))))
6821 @end example
6822
6823 @defun display-table-slot display-table slot
6824 This function returns the value of the extra slot @var{slot} of
6825 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6826 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6827 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6828 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6829 @end defun
6830
6831 @defun set-display-table-slot display-table slot value
6832 This function stores @var{value} in the extra slot @var{slot} of
6833 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6834 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6835 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6836 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6837 @end defun
6838
6839 @defun describe-display-table display-table
6840 This function displays a description of the display table
6841 @var{display-table} in a help buffer.
6842 @end defun
6843
6844 @deffn Command describe-current-display-table
6845 This command displays a description of the current display table in a
6846 help buffer.
6847 @end deffn
6848
6849 @node Active Display Table
6850 @subsection Active Display Table
6851 @cindex active display table
6852
6853 Each window can specify a display table, and so can each buffer.
6854 The window's display table, if there is one, takes precedence over the
6855 buffer's display table. If neither exists, Emacs tries to use the
6856 standard display table; if that is @code{nil}, Emacs uses the usual
6857 character display conventions (@pxref{Usual Display}).
6858
6859 Note that display tables affect how the mode line is displayed, so
6860 if you want to force redisplay of the mode line using a new display
6861 table, call @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6862
6863 @defun window-display-table &optional window
6864 This function returns @var{window}'s display table, or @code{nil} if
6865 there is none. The default for @var{window} is the selected window.
6866 @end defun
6867
6868 @defun set-window-display-table window table
6869 This function sets the display table of @var{window} to @var{table}.
6870 The argument @var{table} should be either a display table or
6871 @code{nil}.
6872 @end defun
6873
6874 @defvar buffer-display-table
6875 This variable is automatically buffer-local in all buffers; its value
6876 specifies the buffer's display table. If it is @code{nil}, there is
6877 no buffer display table.
6878 @end defvar
6879
6880 @defvar standard-display-table
6881 The value of this variable is the standard display table, which is
6882 used when Emacs is displaying a buffer in a window with neither a
6883 window display table nor a buffer display table defined, or when Emacs
6884 is outputting text to the standard output or error streams. Although its
6885 default is typically @code{nil}, in an interactive session if the
6886 terminal cannot display curved quotes, its default maps curved quotes
6887 to ASCII approximations. @xref{Keys in Documentation}.
6888 @end defvar
6889
6890 The @file{disp-table} library defines several functions for changing
6891 the standard display table.
6892
6893 @node Glyphs
6894 @subsection Glyphs
6895 @cindex glyph
6896
6897 @cindex glyph code
6898 A @dfn{glyph} is a graphical symbol which occupies a single
6899 character position on the screen. Each glyph is represented in Lisp
6900 as a @dfn{glyph code}, which specifies a character and optionally a
6901 face to display it in (@pxref{Faces}). The main use of glyph codes is
6902 as the entries of display tables (@pxref{Display Tables}). The
6903 following functions are used to manipulate glyph codes:
6904
6905 @defun make-glyph-code char &optional face
6906 This function returns a glyph code representing char @var{char} with
6907 face @var{face}. If @var{face} is omitted or @code{nil}, the glyph
6908 uses the default face; in that case, the glyph code is an integer. If
6909 @var{face} is non-@code{nil}, the glyph code is not necessarily an
6910 integer object.
6911 @end defun
6912
6913 @defun glyph-char glyph
6914 This function returns the character of glyph code @var{glyph}.
6915 @end defun
6916
6917 @defun glyph-face glyph
6918 This function returns face of glyph code @var{glyph}, or @code{nil} if
6919 @var{glyph} uses the default face.
6920 @end defun
6921
6922 @ifnottex
6923 You can set up a @dfn{glyph table} to change how glyph codes are
6924 actually displayed on text terminals. This feature is semi-obsolete;
6925 use @code{glyphless-char-display} instead (@pxref{Glyphless Chars}).
6926
6927 @defvar glyph-table
6928 The value of this variable, if non-@code{nil}, is the current glyph
6929 table. It takes effect only on character terminals; on graphical
6930 displays, all glyphs are displayed literally. The glyph table should
6931 be a vector whose @var{g}th element specifies how to display glyph
6932 code @var{g}, where @var{g} is the glyph code for a glyph whose face
6933 is unspecified. Each element should be one of the following:
6934
6935 @table @asis
6936 @item @code{nil}
6937 Display this glyph literally.
6938
6939 @item a string
6940 Display this glyph by sending the specified string to the terminal.
6941
6942 @item a glyph code
6943 Display the specified glyph code instead.
6944 @end table
6945
6946 Any integer glyph code greater than or equal to the length of the
6947 glyph table is displayed literally.
6948 @end defvar
6949 @end ifnottex
6950
6951 @node Glyphless Chars
6952 @subsection Glyphless Character Display
6953 @cindex glyphless characters
6954
6955 @dfn{Glyphless characters} are characters which are displayed in a
6956 special way, e.g., as a box containing a hexadecimal code, instead of
6957 being displayed literally. These include characters which are
6958 explicitly defined to be glyphless, as well as characters for which
6959 there is no available font (on a graphical display), and characters
6960 which cannot be encoded by the terminal's coding system (on a text
6961 terminal).
6962
6963 @defvar glyphless-char-display
6964 The value of this variable is a char-table which defines glyphless
6965 characters and how they are displayed. Each entry must be one of the
6966 following display methods:
6967
6968 @table @asis
6969 @item @code{nil}
6970 Display the character in the usual way.
6971
6972 @item @code{zero-width}
6973 Don't display the character.
6974
6975 @item @code{thin-space}
6976 Display a thin space, 1-pixel wide on graphical displays, or
6977 1-character wide on text terminals.
6978
6979 @item @code{empty-box}
6980 Display an empty box.
6981
6982 @item @code{hex-code}
6983 Display a box containing the Unicode codepoint of the character, in
6984 hexadecimal notation.
6985
6986 @item an @acronym{ASCII} string
6987 Display a box containing that string. The string should contain at
6988 most 6 @acronym{ASCII} characters.
6989
6990 @item a cons cell @code{(@var{graphical} . @var{text})}
6991 Display with @var{graphical} on graphical displays, and with
6992 @var{text} on text terminals. Both @var{graphical} and @var{text}
6993 must be one of the display methods described above.
6994 @end table
6995
6996 @noindent
6997 The @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, @code{hex-code}, and
6998 @acronym{ASCII} string display methods are drawn with the
6999 @code{glyphless-char} face. On text terminals, a box is emulated by
7000 square brackets, @samp{[]}.
7001
7002 The char-table has one extra slot, which determines how to display any
7003 character that cannot be displayed with any available font, or cannot
7004 be encoded by the terminal's coding system. Its value should be one
7005 of the above display methods, except @code{zero-width} or a cons cell.
7006
7007 If a character has a non-@code{nil} entry in an active display table,
7008 the display table takes effect; in this case, Emacs does not consult
7009 @code{glyphless-char-display} at all.
7010 @end defvar
7011
7012 @defopt glyphless-char-display-control
7013 This user option provides a convenient way to set
7014 @code{glyphless-char-display} for groups of similar characters. Do
7015 not set its value directly from Lisp code; the value takes effect only
7016 via a custom @code{:set} function (@pxref{Variable Definitions}),
7017 which updates @code{glyphless-char-display}.
7018
7019 Its value should be an alist of elements @code{(@var{group}
7020 . @var{method})}, where @var{group} is a symbol specifying a group of
7021 characters, and @var{method} is a symbol specifying how to display
7022 them.
7023
7024 @var{group} should be one of the following:
7025
7026 @table @code
7027 @item c0-control
7028 @acronym{ASCII} control characters @code{U+0000} to @code{U+001F},
7029 excluding the newline and tab characters (normally displayed as escape
7030 sequences like @samp{^A}; @pxref{Text Display,, How Text Is Displayed,
7031 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
7032
7033 @item c1-control
7034 Non-@acronym{ASCII}, non-printing characters @code{U+0080} to
7035 @code{U+009F} (normally displayed as octal escape sequences like
7036 @samp{\230}).
7037
7038 @item format-control
7039 Characters of Unicode General Category [Cf], such as @samp{U+200E}
7040 (Left-to-Right Mark), but excluding characters that have graphic
7041 images, such as @samp{U+00AD} (Soft Hyphen).
7042
7043 @item no-font
7044 Characters for there is no suitable font, or which cannot be encoded
7045 by the terminal's coding system.
7046 @end table
7047
7048 @c FIXME: this can also be 'acronym', but that's not currently
7049 @c completely implemented; it applies only to the format-control
7050 @c group, and only works if the acronym is in 'char-acronym-table'.
7051 The @var{method} symbol should be one of @code{zero-width},
7052 @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, or @code{hex-code}. These have
7053 the same meanings as in @code{glyphless-char-display}, above.
7054 @end defopt
7055
7056 @node Beeping
7057 @section Beeping
7058 @cindex bell
7059
7060 This section describes how to make Emacs ring the bell (or blink the
7061 screen) to attract the user's attention. Be conservative about how
7062 often you do this; frequent bells can become irritating. Also be
7063 careful not to use just beeping when signaling an error is more
7064 appropriate (@pxref{Errors}).
7065
7066 @defun ding &optional do-not-terminate
7067 @cindex keyboard macro termination
7068 This function beeps, or flashes the screen (see @code{visible-bell} below).
7069 It also terminates any keyboard macro currently executing unless
7070 @var{do-not-terminate} is non-@code{nil}.
7071 @end defun
7072
7073 @defun beep &optional do-not-terminate
7074 This is a synonym for @code{ding}.
7075 @end defun
7076
7077 @defopt visible-bell
7078 This variable determines whether Emacs should flash the screen to
7079 represent a bell. Non-@code{nil} means yes, @code{nil} means no.
7080 This is effective on graphical displays, and on text terminals
7081 provided the terminal's Termcap entry defines the visible bell
7082 capability (@samp{vb}).
7083 @end defopt
7084
7085 @defopt ring-bell-function
7086 If this is non-@code{nil}, it specifies how Emacs should ring the
7087 bell. Its value should be a function of no arguments. If this is
7088 non-@code{nil}, it takes precedence over the @code{visible-bell}
7089 variable.
7090 @end defopt
7091
7092 @node Window Systems
7093 @section Window Systems
7094
7095 Emacs works with several window systems, most notably the X Window
7096 System. Both Emacs and X use the term ``window'', but use it
7097 differently. An Emacs frame is a single window as far as X is
7098 concerned; the individual Emacs windows are not known to X at all.
7099
7100 @defvar window-system
7101 This terminal-local variable tells Lisp programs what window system
7102 Emacs is using for displaying the frame. The possible values are
7103
7104 @table @code
7105 @item x
7106 @cindex X Window System
7107 Emacs is displaying the frame using X.
7108 @item w32
7109 Emacs is displaying the frame using native MS-Windows GUI.
7110 @item ns
7111 Emacs is displaying the frame using the Nextstep interface (used on
7112 GNUstep and Mac OS X).
7113 @item pc
7114 Emacs is displaying the frame using MS-DOS direct screen writes.
7115 @item nil
7116 Emacs is displaying the frame on a character-based terminal.
7117 @end table
7118 @end defvar
7119
7120 @defvar initial-window-system
7121 This variable holds the value of @code{window-system} used for the
7122 first frame created by Emacs during startup. (When Emacs is invoked
7123 with the @option{--daemon} option, it does not create any initial
7124 frames, so @code{initial-window-system} is @code{nil}, except on
7125 MS-Windows, where it is still @code{w32}. @xref{Initial Options,
7126 daemon,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
7127 @end defvar
7128
7129 @defun window-system &optional frame
7130 This function returns a symbol whose name tells what window system is
7131 used for displaying @var{frame} (which defaults to the currently
7132 selected frame). The list of possible symbols it returns is the same
7133 one documented for the variable @code{window-system} above.
7134 @end defun
7135
7136 Do @emph{not} use @code{window-system} and
7137 @code{initial-window-system} as predicates or boolean flag variables,
7138 if you want to write code that works differently on text terminals and
7139 graphic displays. That is because @code{window-system} is not a good
7140 indicator of Emacs capabilities on a given display type. Instead, use
7141 @code{display-graphic-p} or any of the other @code{display-*-p}
7142 predicates described in @ref{Display Feature Testing}.
7143
7144 @node Tooltips
7145 @section Tooltips
7146 @cindex tooltips
7147 @dfn{Tooltips} are special frames (@pxref{Frames}) that are used to
7148 display helpful hints (a.k.a.@: ``tips'') related to the current
7149 position of the mouse pointer. Emacs uses tooltips to display help
7150 strings about active portions of text (@pxref{Special Properties}) and
7151 about various UI elements, such as menu items (@pxref{Extended Menu
7152 Items}) and tool-bar buttons (@pxref{Tool Bar}).
7153
7154 @defun tooltip-mode
7155 Tooltip Mode is a minor mode that enables display of tooltips.
7156 Turning off this mode causes the tooltips be displayed in the echo
7157 area. On text-mode (a.k.a.@: ``TTY'') frames, tooltips are always
7158 displayed in the echo area.
7159 @end defun
7160
7161 @vindex x-gtk-use-system-tooltips
7162 When Emacs is built with GTK+ support, it by default displays tooltips
7163 using GTK+ functions, and the appearance of the tooltips is then
7164 controlled by GTK+ settings. GTK+ tooltips can be disabled by
7165 changing the value of the variable @code{x-gtk-use-system-tooltips} to
7166 @code{nil}. The rest of this subsection describes how to control
7167 non-GTK+ tooltips, which are presented by Emacs itself.
7168
7169 Since tooltips are special frames, they have their frame parameters
7170 (@pxref{Frame Parameters}). Unlike other frames, the frame parameters
7171 for tooltips are stored in a special variable.
7172
7173 @defvar tooltip-frame-parameters
7174 This customizable option holds the frame parameters used for
7175 displaying tooltips. Any font and color parameters are ignored, and
7176 the corresponding attributes of the @code{tooltip} face are used
7177 instead. If @code{left} or @code{top} parameters are included, they
7178 are used as absolute frame-relative coordinates where the tooltip
7179 should be shown. (Mouse-relative position of the tooltip can be
7180 customized using the variables described in @ref{Tooltips,,, emacs,
7181 The GNU Emacs Manual}.) Note that the @code{left} and @code{top}
7182 parameters, if present, override the values of mouse-relative offsets.
7183 @end defvar
7184
7185 @vindex tooltip@r{ face}
7186 The @code{tooltip} face determines the appearance of text shown in
7187 tooltips. It should generally use a variable-pitch font of size that
7188 is preferably smaller than the default frame font.
7189
7190 @findex tooltip-help-tips
7191 @defvar tooltip-functions
7192 This abnormal hook is a list of functions to call when Emacs needs to
7193 display a tooltip. Each function is called with a single argument
7194 @var{event} which is a copy of the last mouse movement event. If a
7195 function on this list actually displays the tooltip, it should return
7196 non-@code{nil}, and then the rest of the functions will not be
7197 called. The default value of this variable is a single function
7198 @code{tooltip-help-tips}.
7199 @end defvar
7200
7201 If you write your own function to be put on the
7202 @code{tooltip-functions} list, you may need to know the buffer of the
7203 mouse event that triggered the tooltip display. The following
7204 function provides that information.
7205
7206 @defun tooltip-event-buffer event
7207 This function returns the buffer over which @var{event} occurred.
7208 Call it with the argument of the function from
7209 @code{tooltip-functions} to obtain the buffer whose text triggered the
7210 tooltip. Note that the event might occur not over a buffer (e.g.,
7211 over the tool bar), in which case this function will return
7212 @code{nil}.
7213 @end defun
7214
7215 Other aspects of tooltip display are controlled by several
7216 customizable settings; see @ref{Tooltips,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs
7217 Manual}.
7218
7219 @node Bidirectional Display
7220 @section Bidirectional Display
7221 @cindex bidirectional display
7222 @cindex right-to-left text
7223
7224 Emacs can display text written in scripts, such as Arabic, Farsi,
7225 and Hebrew, whose natural ordering for horizontal text display runs
7226 from right to left. Furthermore, segments of Latin script and digits
7227 embedded in right-to-left text are displayed left-to-right, while
7228 segments of right-to-left script embedded in left-to-right text
7229 (e.g., Arabic or Hebrew text in comments or strings in a program
7230 source file) are appropriately displayed right-to-left. We call such
7231 mixtures of left-to-right and right-to-left text @dfn{bidirectional
7232 text}. This section describes the facilities and options for editing
7233 and displaying bidirectional text.
7234
7235 @cindex logical order
7236 @cindex reading order
7237 @cindex visual order
7238 @cindex unicode bidirectional algorithm
7239 @cindex UBA
7240 @cindex bidirectional reordering
7241 @cindex reordering, of bidirectional text
7242 Text is stored in Emacs buffers and strings in @dfn{logical} (or
7243 @dfn{reading}) order, i.e., the order in which a human would read
7244 each character. In right-to-left and bidirectional text, the order in
7245 which characters are displayed on the screen (called @dfn{visual
7246 order}) is not the same as logical order; the characters' screen
7247 positions do not increase monotonically with string or buffer
7248 position. In performing this @dfn{bidirectional reordering}, Emacs
7249 follows the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm (a.k.a.@: @acronym{UBA}),
7250 which is described in Annex #9 of the Unicode standard
7251 (@url{http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr9/}). Emacs provides a ``Full
7252 Bidirectionality'' class implementation of the @acronym{UBA},
7253 consistent with the requirements of the Unicode Standard v8.0.
7254
7255 @defvar bidi-display-reordering
7256 If the value of this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil} (the
7257 default), Emacs performs bidirectional reordering for display. The
7258 reordering affects buffer text, as well as display strings and overlay
7259 strings from text and overlay properties in the buffer (@pxref{Overlay
7260 Properties}, and @pxref{Display Property}). If the value is
7261 @code{nil}, Emacs does not perform bidirectional reordering in the
7262 buffer.
7263
7264 The default value of @code{bidi-display-reordering} controls the
7265 reordering of strings which are not directly supplied by a buffer,
7266 including the text displayed in mode lines (@pxref{Mode Line Format})
7267 and header lines (@pxref{Header Lines}).
7268 @end defvar
7269
7270 @cindex unibyte buffers, and bidi reordering
7271 Emacs never reorders the text of a unibyte buffer, even if
7272 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is non-@code{nil} in the buffer. This
7273 is because unibyte buffers contain raw bytes, not characters, and thus
7274 lack the directionality properties required for reordering.
7275 Therefore, to test whether text in a buffer will be reordered for
7276 display, it is not enough to test the value of
7277 @code{bidi-display-reordering} alone. The correct test is this:
7278
7279 @example
7280 (if (and enable-multibyte-characters
7281 bidi-display-reordering)
7282 ;; Buffer is being reordered for display
7283 )
7284 @end example
7285
7286 However, unibyte display and overlay strings @emph{are} reordered if
7287 their parent buffer is reordered. This is because plain-@sc{ascii}
7288 strings are stored by Emacs as unibyte strings. If a unibyte display
7289 or overlay string includes non-@sc{ascii} characters, these characters
7290 are assumed to have left-to-right direction.
7291
7292 @cindex display properties, and bidi reordering of text
7293 Text covered by @code{display} text properties, by overlays with
7294 @code{display} properties whose value is a string, and by any other
7295 properties that replace buffer text, is treated as a single unit when
7296 it is reordered for display. That is, the entire chunk of text
7297 covered by these properties is reordered together. Moreover, the
7298 bidirectional properties of the characters in such a chunk of text are
7299 ignored, and Emacs reorders them as if they were replaced with a
7300 single character @code{U+FFFC}, known as the @dfn{Object Replacement
7301 Character}. This means that placing a display property over a portion
7302 of text may change the way that the surrounding text is reordered for
7303 display. To prevent this unexpected effect, always place such
7304 properties on text whose directionality is identical with text that
7305 surrounds it.
7306
7307 @cindex base direction of a paragraph
7308 Each paragraph of bidirectional text has a @dfn{base direction},
7309 either right-to-left or left-to-right. Left-to-right paragraphs are
7310 displayed beginning at the left margin of the window, and are
7311 truncated or continued when the text reaches the right margin.
7312 Right-to-left paragraphs are displayed beginning at the right margin,
7313 and are continued or truncated at the left margin.
7314
7315 By default, Emacs determines the base direction of each paragraph by
7316 looking at the text at its beginning. The precise method of
7317 determining the base direction is specified by the @acronym{UBA}; in a
7318 nutshell, the first character in a paragraph that has an explicit
7319 directionality determines the base direction of the paragraph.
7320 However, sometimes a buffer may need to force a certain base direction
7321 for its paragraphs. For example, buffers containing program source
7322 code should force all paragraphs to be displayed left-to-right. You
7323 can use following variable to do this:
7324
7325 @defvar bidi-paragraph-direction
7326 If the value of this buffer-local variable is the symbol
7327 @code{right-to-left} or @code{left-to-right}, all paragraphs in the
7328 buffer are assumed to have that specified direction. Any other value
7329 is equivalent to @code{nil} (the default), which means to determine
7330 the base direction of each paragraph from its contents.
7331
7332 @cindex @code{prog-mode}, and @code{bidi-paragraph-direction}
7333 Modes for program source code should set this to @code{left-to-right}.
7334 Prog mode does this by default, so modes derived from Prog mode do not
7335 need to set this explicitly (@pxref{Basic Major Modes}).
7336 @end defvar
7337
7338 @defun current-bidi-paragraph-direction &optional buffer
7339 This function returns the paragraph direction at point in the named
7340 @var{buffer}. The returned value is a symbol, either
7341 @code{left-to-right} or @code{right-to-left}. If @var{buffer} is
7342 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the current buffer. If the
7343 buffer-local value of the variable @code{bidi-paragraph-direction} is
7344 non-@code{nil}, the returned value will be identical to that value;
7345 otherwise, the returned value reflects the paragraph direction
7346 determined dynamically by Emacs. For buffers whose value of
7347 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is @code{nil} as well as unibyte
7348 buffers, this function always returns @code{left-to-right}.
7349 @end defun
7350
7351 @cindex visual-order cursor motion
7352 Sometimes there's a need to move point in strict visual order,
7353 either to the left or to the right of its current screen position.
7354 Emacs provides a primitive to do that.
7355
7356 @defun move-point-visually direction
7357 This function moves point of the currently selected window to the
7358 buffer position that appears immediately to the right or to the left
7359 of point on the screen. If @var{direction} is positive, point will
7360 move one screen position to the right, otherwise it will move one
7361 screen position to the left. Note that, depending on the surrounding
7362 bidirectional context, this could potentially move point many buffer
7363 positions away. If invoked at the end of a screen line, the function
7364 moves point to the rightmost or leftmost screen position of the next
7365 or previous screen line, as appropriate for the value of
7366 @var{direction}.
7367
7368 The function returns the new buffer position as its value.
7369 @end defun
7370
7371 @cindex layout on display, and bidirectional text
7372 @cindex jumbled display of bidirectional text
7373 @cindex concatenating bidirectional strings
7374 Bidirectional reordering can have surprising and unpleasant effects
7375 when two strings with bidirectional content are juxtaposed in a
7376 buffer, or otherwise programmatically concatenated into a string of
7377 text. A typical problematic case is when a buffer consists of
7378 sequences of text fields separated by whitespace or punctuation
7379 characters, like Buffer Menu mode or Rmail Summary Mode. Because the
7380 punctuation characters used as separators have @dfn{weak
7381 directionality}, they take on the directionality of surrounding text.
7382 As result, a numeric field that follows a field with bidirectional
7383 content can be displayed @emph{to the left} of the preceding field,
7384 messing up the expected layout. There are several ways to avoid this
7385 problem:
7386
7387 @itemize @minus
7388 @item
7389 Append the special character @code{U+200E}, LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK, or
7390 @acronym{LRM}, to the end of each field that may have bidirectional
7391 content, or prepend it to the beginning of the following field. The
7392 function @code{bidi-string-mark-left-to-right}, described below, comes
7393 in handy for this purpose. (In a right-to-left paragraph, use
7394 @code{U+200F}, RIGHT-TO-LEFT MARK, or @acronym{RLM}, instead.) This
7395 is one of the solutions recommended by the UBA.
7396
7397 @item
7398 Include the tab character in the field separator. The tab character
7399 plays the role of @dfn{segment separator} in bidirectional reordering,
7400 causing the text on either side to be reordered separately.
7401
7402 @cindex @code{space} display spec, and bidirectional text
7403 @item
7404 Separate fields with a @code{display} property or overlay with a
7405 property value of the form @code{(space . PROPS)} (@pxref{Specified
7406 Space}). Emacs treats this display specification as a @dfn{paragraph
7407 separator}, and reorders the text on either side separately.
7408 @end itemize
7409
7410 @defun bidi-string-mark-left-to-right string
7411 This function returns its argument @var{string}, possibly modified,
7412 such that the result can be safely concatenated with another string,
7413 or juxtaposed with another string in a buffer, without disrupting the
7414 relative layout of this string and the next one on display. If the
7415 string returned by this function is displayed as part of a
7416 left-to-right paragraph, it will always appear on display to the left
7417 of the text that follows it. The function works by examining the
7418 characters of its argument, and if any of those characters could cause
7419 reordering on display, the function appends the @acronym{LRM}
7420 character to the string. The appended @acronym{LRM} character is made
7421 invisible by giving it an @code{invisible} text property of @code{t}
7422 (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
7423 @end defun
7424
7425 The reordering algorithm uses the bidirectional properties of the
7426 characters stored as their @code{bidi-class} property
7427 (@pxref{Character Properties}). Lisp programs can change these
7428 properties by calling the @code{put-char-code-property} function.
7429 However, doing this requires a thorough understanding of the
7430 @acronym{UBA}, and is therefore not recommended. Any changes to the
7431 bidirectional properties of a character have global effect: they
7432 affect all Emacs frames and windows.
7433
7434 Similarly, the @code{mirroring} property is used to display the
7435 appropriate mirrored character in the reordered text. Lisp programs
7436 can affect the mirrored display by changing this property. Again, any
7437 such changes affect all of Emacs display.
7438
7439 @cindex overriding bidirectional properties
7440 @cindex directional overrides
7441 @cindex LRO
7442 @cindex RLO
7443 The bidirectional properties of characters can be overridden by
7444 inserting into the text special directional control characters,
7445 LEFT-TO-RIGHT OVERRIDE (@acronym{LRO}) and RIGHT-TO-LEFT OVERRIDE
7446 (@acronym{RLO}). Any characters between a @acronym{RLO} and the
7447 following newline or POP DIRECTIONAL FORMATTING (@acronym{PDF})
7448 control character, whichever comes first, will be displayed as if they
7449 were strong right-to-left characters, i.e.@: they will be reversed on
7450 display. Similarly, any characters between @acronym{LRO} and
7451 @acronym{PDF} or newline will display as if they were strong
7452 left-to-right, and will @emph{not} be reversed even if they are strong
7453 right-to-left characters.
7454
7455 @cindex phishing using directional overrides
7456 @cindex malicious use of directional overrides
7457 These overrides are useful when you want to make some text
7458 unaffected by the reordering algorithm, and instead directly control
7459 the display order. But they can also be used for malicious purposes,
7460 known as @dfn{phishing}. Specifically, a URL on a Web page or a link
7461 in an email message can be manipulated to make its visual appearance
7462 unrecognizable, or similar to some popular benign location, while the
7463 real location, interpreted by a browser in the logical order, is very
7464 different.
7465
7466 Emacs provides a primitive that applications can use to detect
7467 instances of text whose bidirectional properties were overridden so as
7468 to make a left-to-right character display as if it were a
7469 right-to-left character, or vise versa.
7470
7471 @defun bidi-find-overridden-directionality from to &optional object
7472 This function looks at the text of the specified @var{object} between
7473 positions @var{from} (inclusive) and @var{to} (exclusive), and returns
7474 the first position where it finds a strong left-to-right character
7475 whose directional properties were forced to display the character as
7476 right-to-left, or for a strong right-to-left character that was forced
7477 to display as left-to-right. If it finds no such characters in the
7478 specified region of text, it returns @code{nil}.
7479
7480 The optional argument @var{object} specifies which text to search, and
7481 defaults to the current buffer. If @var{object} is non-@code{nil}, it
7482 can be some other buffer, or it can be a string or a window. If it is
7483 a string, the function searches that string. If it is a window, the
7484 function searches the buffer displayed in that window. If a buffer
7485 whose text you want to examine is displayed in some window, we
7486 recommend to specify it by that window, rather than pass the buffer to
7487 the function. This is because telling the function about the window
7488 allows it to correctly account for window-specific overlays, which
7489 might change the result of the function if some text in the buffer is
7490 covered by overlays.
7491 @end defun
7492
7493 @cindex copying bidirectional text, preserve visual order
7494 @cindex visual order, preserve when copying bidirectional text
7495 When text that includes mixed right-to-left and left-to-right
7496 characters and bidirectional controls is copied into a different
7497 location, it can change its visual appearance, and also can affect the
7498 visual appearance of the surrounding text at destination. This is
7499 because reordering of bidirectional text specified by the
7500 @acronym{UBA} has non-trivial context-dependent effects both on the
7501 copied text and on the text at copy destination that will surround it.
7502
7503 Sometimes, a Lisp program may need to preserve the exact visual
7504 appearance of the copied text at destination, and of the text that
7505 surrounds the copy. Lisp programs can use the following function to
7506 achieve that effect.
7507
7508 @defun buffer-substring-with-bidi-context start end &optional no-properties
7509 This function works similar to @code{buffer-substring} (@pxref{Buffer
7510 Contents}), but it prepends and appends to the copied text bidi
7511 directional control characters necessary to preserve the visual
7512 appearance of the text when it is inserted at another place. Optional
7513 argument @var{no-properties}, if non-@code{nil}, means remove the text
7514 properties from the copy of the text.
7515 @end defun